Chevrolet 2010 Silverado 1500 инструкция обслуживания

2010 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M In Brief ................ .......... ........... ....... 1 - 1 I n s t r u m e n t P a n e l ... .............................. 1 - 2 Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 V ehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Seats and Restraint System ...................... 2 - 1 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 F r o n t S e a t s ...................... ................. 2 - 4 R e a r S e a t s ...................................... 2 - 1 4 Safety Bel[...]

2010 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M H e a d l a m p A i m i n g ............................... 6 - 5 4 B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t ... ........................... 6 - 5 7 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 T i r e s ............. ................. .............. 6 - 6 4 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 10 V ehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 17 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 17 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET , the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names SIL VERADO and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “ General Motors of Canada Limited ” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. If the vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, refer t[...]

Safety W arnings and Symbols W arning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. W arning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death. { W ARNING: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Notice: This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty . A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “ Do Not, ” “ Do not do this, ” or “ Do not let this happen. ” V ehicle Symbo[...]

V ehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the index. 0 : Adjustable Pedals 9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ® $ : Brake System Warning Light " : Charging System I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant T emperature O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gauge + : Fuses i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LA TCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors } : Power / : Remote V ehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : [...]

2 NOTES vi[...]

Section 1 In Brief Instrument Panel ................................... 1-2 Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel V ersion) . . . . . . . . 1-2 Instrument Panel (Premium V ersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Initial Drive Information .. ....... .................. 1-6 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Remote V ehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 W i n d o w s ........................................ 1 - 7 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Instrument Panel Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel V ersion) 1-2[...]

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4 ‑ 28 . B. T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4 ‑ 4 . C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 49 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . E. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 ‑ 29 . F . Shift Lever . See Automatic T ransmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 28 . T ow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 34 . Range Selection Mode (Allison Transmission and Hydra-Matic ® 6 ‐ Speed Button (If Equipped). See Automatic T ransmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 28 . G. Audio System(s) on page 4 ‑ 82 . H. Instrument Panel Storage on page 3 ‑ 76 . I. Integrated T railer [...]

Instrument Panel (Premium V ersion) 1-4[...]

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4 ‑ 28 . B. T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4 ‑ 4 . C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 ‑ 29 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . E. Shift Lever . See Automatic T ransmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 28 . F . T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 34 (If Equipped). G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 49 . H. Audio System(s) on page 4 ‑ 82 . I. Exterior Lamps on page 4 ‑ 10 . J. Integrated T railer Brake Controller (If Equipped). See T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 . K. Dome Lamp Override on page 4 ‑ 15 . Dome Lamps on page 4 ‑ 14 . L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equippe[...]

Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle. Press K to unlock the driver door . Press K again within three seconds to unlock all remaining doors. Press Q to lock all doors. Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. Press L and release to locate the vehicle. Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound the panic alarm. Pres[...]

The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once. Canceling a Remote Start T o cancel a remote start: . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off. . T urn on the hazard warning flashers. . T urn the ignition on and then back off. See Remote V ehicle Start on page 3 ‑ 7 . Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle. From outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key in the driver door. From inside, use the power door locks or the manual door locks. T o lock or unlock the door with the manual locks, push down or pu[...]

Power Windows Crew Cab Shown If available, the power window switches are located on each of the side doors in the front and rear , if equipped. The driver door has a switch for the passenger window and rear windows as well. Press the switch to lower the window . Pull the switch up to raise it. For more information, see: . Windows on page 3 ‑ 14 . . Power Windows on page 3 ‑ 15 . Power Sliding Rear Window On vehicles with a power sliding rear window , the switch is located in the overhead console. The power sliding rear window cannot be operated manually . Push or pull the switch to open or close the window . 1-8[...]

Seat Adjustment Front Seats Manual Seats If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar . T ry to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. See Manual Seats on page 2 ‑ 4 . Power Seats If equipped, the power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the front seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. Raise or lower the front or rear part of the cushion by moving the front or rear part of the control up or down. Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. See Power S[...]

Manual Lumbar If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward. Power Lumbar If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. On vehicles with two-way lumbar , press and hold the top of the control to increase lumbar support. T o decrease, press and hold the bottom of the control. 1-10[...]

On vehicles with four-way lumbar , press and hold the front of the control to increase lumbar support. T o decrease, press and hold the rear of the control. T o raise the height of the support, press and hold the top of the control. T o lower , press and hold the bottom of the control. See Power Lumbar on page 2 ‑ 7 . Manual Reclining Seatbacks If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. T o recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever . 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 10 . Power Reclining Seatbac[...]

T o recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. T o bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 10 . Memory Features This vehicle may have the memory package. The controls for this feature are located on the driver door , and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver seat, outside mirrors, and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature. For more information, see Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 . Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are located on the driver and passenger doors. I : Press to heat the seatback only . J : Press to heat the seat and seatb[...]

Safety Belt Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly . . Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 16 . . How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 ‑ 21 . . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 30 . . Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 . Sensing System for Passenger Airbag The passenger sensing system, if equipped, turns off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags, seat ‐ mounted side impact airbags and roof ‐ rail airbags are not affected by this. If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a p[...]

If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 ‑ 82 for more information. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. United States Canada See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 86 for important information. Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors V ehicles with outside power mirrors and foldaway mirrors have controls located on the driver door . 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger side mirror . 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror . 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. 1-14[...]

Power Foldaway Mirrors T o fold the mirrors: 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. V ehicles with manual outside mirrors can be adjusted for a clearer view . If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer . See Outside T owing Mirrors on page 3 ‑ 57 . Manual Foldaway Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. T o fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original po[...]

Steering Wheel Adjustment The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column. T o adjust the steering wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever . 2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position. 3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place. See Tilt Wheel on page 4 ‑ 3 . Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment On vehicles with this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body . Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away f[...]

Interior Lighting Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed. The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column, clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed. k : The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control. Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading[...]

Exterior Lighting The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. O : Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). T urn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps. ; : T urns on the parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps. 2 : T urns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and licen[...]

6 : Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 6 : Slow wipes. ? : Fast wipes. L (W asher Fluid): Push the paddle at the top of the lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield. See Windshield Wipers on page 4 ‑ 6 and Windshield Washer on page 4 ‑ 6 . Climate Controls These systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation. Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) A. Fan Control B. T emperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control D. Air Conditioning E. Outside Air F . Air Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger 1-19[...]

Climate Control System (With Heater Only) A. Fan Control B. T emperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control Dual Automatic Climate Control System A. Driver and Passenger T emperature Controls B. Fan Control C. AUTO D. Defrost E. Air Recirculation F . Outside Air G. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. P ASS (Passenger) See Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) on page 4 ‑ 18 or Climate Control System (With Heater Only) on page 4 ‑ 21 and Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 22 . 1-20[...]

T ransmission Range Selection Mode The Range Selection Mode switch is located on the shift lever . T o enable the Range Selection feature, move the column shift lever to the M (Manual) position. The current range will appear next to the M. This is the highest attainable range with all lower gears accessible. As an example, when 4 (Fourth) gear is selected, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are available. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering column shift lever , to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. See Automatic T ransmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 28 . While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and the T ow/Haul mode can be used. Grade[...]

Manual T ransfer Case This transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver . Electronic T ransfer Case This transfer case knob is located next to the steering column. 1-22[...]

Automatic T ransfer Case This transfer case knob is located next to the steering column. Each transfer case design offers dif ferent drive options. The list below described the different drive options that may be available. 2 m (T wo-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable. 4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. N (Neutral): Shift the transfer case to Neutral only when towing the vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle [...]

V ehicle Features Radio(s) Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume. BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM ™ , if equipped. f : Select radio stations. © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. 4 : Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line. When information is not available, “ NO INFO ” displays. For more information about these and other radio features, see Radio(s) on [...]

Setting the Clock T o set the time and date for the radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: 1. T urn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ RUN, then press O , to turn the radio on. 2. Press H to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour , minute, month, day , and year). 3. Press the softkey located under any one of the labels to be changed. 4. T o increase or decrease the time or date, turn f clockwise or counter ‐ clockwise. For detailed instructions on setting the clock for the vehicle's specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on page 4 ‑ 82 . Satellite Radio XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM satellite radio [...]

Steering Wheel Controls For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. w / x : Press to change favorite radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on an iPod ® or USB device. b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only . Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with OnStar ® or Bluetooth systems, if equipped. + e − e : Increases or decreases volume. c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call. SRCE: Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary , and rear auxiliary . ¨ : Press to seek the next radio[...]

Driver Information Center (DIC) The DIC display is located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster . It shows the status of many vehicle systems and enables access to the personalization menu. The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. Some vehicles do not have the buttons shown, however some of the menus can be viewed by using the trip odometer reset stem. 3 : Press this button to display the odometer , trip odometer , fuel range, average economy , fuel used, timer , and transmission temperature. The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display . The temperature will be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected. [...]

See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 . Cruise Control The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel. I : T urns the system on or off. The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off. + RES : Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate. SET − : Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate. [ : Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory . See Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 7 . Rear Vision Camera (RVC) The rear vision camera displays a view of the area behind the vehicle[...]

Power Outlets Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located below the climate control system, or may have one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter . The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle closest to the driver . There may be another accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area. If the vehicle has a floor console, there is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear of the floor console. The accessory power outlets are powered, even when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF . Continuing to use power outlets while the igni[...]

Sunroof Extended Cab The sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror . V ent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear of the switch to vent the sunroof. Open: From the vent position, press and hold the rear of the switch to open the sunroof. Close: Press and hold the front of the switch to close the sunroof. The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be used to block the rays of the sun. T o open the sunshade, press and unlatch it, and roll it back. T o close, pull it forward and latch it into the closed position. Crew Cab There are two sunroof switches located in the overhead console above the rearview mirror . 1-30[...]

V ent: From the closed position, press the rear of the passenger side switch to vent the sunroof. Manual-Open/Manual-Close: T o open the sunroof, press and hold the rear of the driver side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. Press and hold the front of the driver side switch to close it. Express-Open/Express-Close: T o express-open the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. T o express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the driver side switch. Press the switch again to stop it. The sunroof also has a sunshade that you can pull forward to block the rays of the sun. The sunshade[...]

Tire Pressure Monitor This vehicle may have a T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The T ire Pressure Monitor alerts you when a significant reduction in pressure occurs in one or more of the vehicle ’ s tires by illuminating the low tire pressure warning light on the instrument cluster . If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the tire loading information label located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 . The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected. Y ou may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire pressure warning light will app[...]

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset as follows: 1. T urn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds. 3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the display shows 100%, the system is reset. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 . Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) V ehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0), the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine (VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2) have a yellow fuel cap and can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 7 and Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6 [...]

Roadside Assistance Program U.S.: 1-800-CHEV -USA (1-800-243-8872) TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 Canada: 1-800-268-6800 As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This program provides technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day , 365 days a year , minor repair information or towing arrangements. For more information see Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . Roadside Assistance and OnStar If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem, contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location to get you the [...]

Crisis Assist, Stolen V ehicle Assistance, V ehicle Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance, T urn ‐ by ‐ T urn Navigation and Hands ‐ Free Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. For more information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit www .onstar .com (U.S.) or www .onstar .ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONST AR (1 ‐ 888 ‐ 466 ‐ 7827) or TTY 1 ‐ 877 ‐ 248 ‐ 2080, or press Q to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day , 7 days a week. For a full description of OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the glove box. OnStar service is subject to the OnSta[...]

OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a T alk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 ‑ 143 for more information. On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. Y our Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly . Press Q and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and[...]

Section 2 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints ............................... ..... 2-3 Front Seats ......................................... 2-4 Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 H e a t e d S e a t s ................................ ... 2 - 8 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Section 2 Seats and Restraint System Airbag System ................. ............ ....... 2-73 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 What Will Y ou See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-80 Airbag Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 Servicing Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle . . . . . . . 2-92 Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V e h i c l e .........[...]

Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. { W ARNING: With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly , there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly . Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 2-3[...]

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. T o lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints are not designed to be removed. The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down. Front Seats Manual Seats { W ARNING: Y ou can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 2-4[...]

If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar . T ry to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. Power Seats Driver's Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. 2-5[...]

Y our vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle's power seat: . Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats. See “ Power Reclining Seatbacks ” under Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 10 . A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 [...]

Power Lumbar On seats with power lumbar , the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. This vehicle may have 2 – way lumbar . . T o increase lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. . T o decrease lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. The vehicle may have 4 – way lumbar . . T o increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control. . T o decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control. . T o raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. . T o lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Release the control when the [...]

Heated Seats { W ARNING: If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. T o reduce the risk of burns, people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater , especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat. On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are located on the driver and passenger doors. I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated seatback. J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press [...]

T o save seating positions in memory: 1. Adjust the driver's seatback recliner , both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3 ‑ 57 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3 ‑ 26 for more information. Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake pedals will have the ability to save and recall their positions. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to indicate that the position has been stored. A second seating, mirror , and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2. T o recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in P (Park).[...]

Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver ’ s door panel between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in P (Park), the driver's seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. Y ou will hear a single beep, and the driver ’ s seat will move back approximately 8 cm (3 in). T o move the seat back further , press the exit button again until the seat is all the way back. If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See “ EASY EXIT SEA T ” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 for more information. Th[...]

{ W ARNING: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either . In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly . 2-1 1[...]

Manual Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat(s). T o recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever . 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. T o return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 2-12[...]

Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. . T o recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. . T o bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Seatback Latches The front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access to the rear of the cab. T o tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. { W ARNING: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sittin[...]

Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab Full Bench) Folding the Rear Seat T o fold the seat up, do the following: Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 1. Pull up on the front of the seat cushion while pulling down on the release strap, located under the seat cushion. 2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the seatback. 3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull forward on it to make sure it is locked. T o fold the seat down, do the following: 1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling t[...]

Rear Seat Operation (All Split Bench and Hybrid Full Bench) Folding Rear Seat On a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seat either side of the rear seat may be folded for added cargo space. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Make sure that nothing is on the seat. T o fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up. T o return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly pull the seat cushion down. { W ARNING: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide th[...]

Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly . It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. { W ARNING: Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly . In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. Y ou can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. Y ou and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. { W ARNING: People riding on the tail[...]

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why: Y ou never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away . Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear . In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. T ake [...]

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 2-18[...]

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel... 2-19[...]

or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. Y ou get more time to stop. Y ou stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: Y ou could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supple[...]

Q: If I am a good driver , and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: Y ou may be an excellent driver , but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different[...]

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. 2-22[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury . The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body . 2-23[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 2-24[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 2-25[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. 2-26[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury . Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Y ou could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-27[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is behind the body . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly . In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Y our body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury . Y ou might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-28[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly , or ask your dealer to fix it. 2-29[...]

Lap-Shoulder Belt If the vehicle is a regular cab, then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If the vehicle is a crew or extended cab, then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position (if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) on page 2 ‑ 37 for more information. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly . 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. T o see how , see “ Seats ” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may loc[...]

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 ‑ 38 . If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, check if the correct buckle is being used. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster , move it to the height that is right for you. See “ Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ” later in this section. 5. T o make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate[...]

T o unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way . If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger . Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder . The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder . Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. 2-32[...]

Regular and Crew Cab T o move the adjuster down for the regular and crew cabs, squeeze the buttons (A) on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position. Extended Cab On the extended cab, push down on the release button (A) and move the height adjuster to the desired position. Y ou can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down, without squeezing the buttons for the regular and crew cabs, or without pushing the release button for extended cabs, to make sure it has locked into position. 2-33[...]

Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly . They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt sys[...]

Here is how to install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body . 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 2-35[...]

{ W ARNING: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder . T o remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide onto the storage clip. 2-36[...]

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy . The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother . When a safety belt is worn properly , it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly . Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) This section is only for the lap belt. T o learn how to wear [...]

T o make the belt shorter , pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 ‑ 38 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary . Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender . When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear , so the extender will be long enough for you. T o help avoid personal injury , do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extende[...]

Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts. The manufacturer's instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster . Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test: . Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “ Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 30 for[...]

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see “ Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 30 . According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant res[...]

{ W ARNING: Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly . In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury . The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-41[...]

Infants and Y oung Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { W ARNING: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap ‐ shoulder belts offer protection for ad[...]

{ W ARNING: Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 2-43[...]

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's owner , are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer&[...]

{ W ARNING: A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. T o reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to[...]

A forward-facing child seat (B) provides restraint for the child's body with the harness. A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window . 2-46[...]

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the V ehicle { W ARNING: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LA TCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. T o help reduce the chance of injury , the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LA TCH system. See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for more i[...]

Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger seat, and the vehicle has a switch in the glove box to manually turn off the right front passenger airbag, see Airbag Off Switch on page 2 [...]

{ W ARNING: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat. Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Wherever a child res[...]

Lower Anchors Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LA TCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). T op T ether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Y our child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anch[...]

Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether , and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether , one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Lower Anchor and T op T ether Anchor Locations Regular Cab — T wo-Passenger Front Seat Regular Cab — Three-Passenger Front Seat i (T op T ether Anchor): Seat[...]

Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat i (T op T ether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. For crew and extended cab models, the rear outboard seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For regular cab models, there is an anchor symbol on the covers to assist you in locating the top tether anchors. 2-52[...]

Regular Cab Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position on page 2 ‑ 61 for more information. For regular cab models, the top tether anchors are located under covers on the back panel behind the passenger seat. Remove the trim plug to access the anchor . Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab Similar For crew and extended cab models, the top tether anchors are the loops located near the top of the seatback for each rear seating position. These loops will be used to route the top tether thro[...]

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 48 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LA TCH System { W ARNING: If a LA TCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly .[...]

Notice: Do not let the LA TCH attachments rub against the vehicle ’ s safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary , move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LA TCH attachments. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat. Regular Cab Models 1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor , if your vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 1. 1. Pull the passenger seatback forward by pulling the[...]

2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) on page 2 ‑ 61 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 2 ‑ 65 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) on page 2 ‑ 70 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Crew and Extended Cab Models 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, [...]

Example — Rear Driver's Side Position 2. 1. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear driver side position: A. Raise the headrest or head restraint . B. Route the top tether (B) between the headrest or head restraint posts, through the loop (A), behind the inboard headrest or head restraint post, and under the center shoulder belt (C). C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether anchor (loop) (D) at the center rear seating position. 2. 2. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear center position: A. Route the top tether (B) through the center loop (D), and behind the inboard passenger side headrest or head restraint post. B. Attach the top tether ([...]

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LA TCH system, see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for how and where to install the child restraint using LA TCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether , see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires t[...]

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 2-59[...]

5. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. If the child restraint has a top tether , follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether . See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. T o remove the child restraint, unbuckle the[...]

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position { W ARNING: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat. Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 48 . In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designe[...]

A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal ai[...]

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether , and that the tether be attached. Y ou will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system, if equipped, has turned off the right front passenger frontal airb[...]

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 2-64[...]

7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether , follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether . See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for more information. 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing system, and when the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, [...]

A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front unless airbag is off. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system [...]

If the child restraint has the LA TCH system, see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for how and where to install the child restraint using LA TCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether , see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether , and that the[...]

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 2-68[...]

6. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your child restraint has a top tether , follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether . See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 . 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. T o remove the child[...]

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) Y our vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 48 . A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here is why: { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint [...]

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary . 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 2-71[...]

6. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. If your child restraint has a top tether , follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether . See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 49 for more information. 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. T o remove the child restraint, unbu[...]

Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags: . A frontal airbag for the driver . . A frontal airbag for the right front passenger . The vehicle may have the following airbags: . A seat ‐ mounted side impact airbag for the driver . . A seat ‐ mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger . . A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver . . A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind the right front passenger . All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appe[...]

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { W ARNING: Y ou can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 78 . Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “ supplemental restraints ” to the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — wheth[...]

{ W ARNING: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Y oung children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. T o read how , see Older Children on page 2 ‑ 39 or Infants and Y oung Children on page 2 ‑ 42 . There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster , which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airb[...]

The right front passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar If the vehicle has seat ‐ mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger , they are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door . 2-76[...]

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver , right front passenger , and second row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side windows. { W ARNING: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear . Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. Never s[...]

When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right front passenger's head and chest. However , they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows[...]

V ehicles with dual stage airbags also have a driver's seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat (all models). The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment. The vehicle may or may not have seat ‐ mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 2 ‑ 73 . Seat ‐ mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat ‐ mounted side impact and roof-rail a[...]

How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body , stopping the occupant more gradually . Seat ‐ mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body . Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in [...]

{ W ARNING: When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air . This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. T o avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door . If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. Y ou can lock t[...]

. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See V ehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 8 ‑ 17 and Event Data Recorders on page 8 ‑ 17 . . Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly . See your dealer for service. Airbag Off Switch If one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations is located in the glove box, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag. United States Canada If the vehicle does not have an airbag off switch, it may have a passenger sensing system.[...]

This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: . My vehicle has no rear seat; . My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or . The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: . My vehicle has no r[...]

Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: . Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and . Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger , even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. { W ARNING: If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not t[...]

{ W ARNING: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. T o help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away . See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 32 for more information, including important safety information. United States Canada T o turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on position. The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Light on page 4 ?[...]

Passenger Sensing System If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove box. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 ‑ 82 for more information. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, the label on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ ADV ANCED AIRBAGS ” . United[...]

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front [...]

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if: . The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. . The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint. . A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. . Or , if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 34 . The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the right fron[...]

If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit: 1. T urn the vehicle off. 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. 3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System in the Index. 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback[...]

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: 1. T urn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and hav[...]

Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “ Safety Belts ” and “ Child Restraints ” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way , the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. A thick layer of additional material, [...]

Servicing Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Y our dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. T o purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 ‑ 16 . { W ARNING: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. Y ou can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures[...]

deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 86 . If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step T wo of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 ‑ 2 . If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6 ‑ 85 for additional important information. Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the airbags from working properly? A: We have des[...]

Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly . Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. T orn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away . Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 ‑ 31 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry . See Care of Safety Be[...]

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { W ARNING: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. T o help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LA TCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary . But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assembl[...]

2 NOTES 2-96[...]

Section 3 Features and Controls Keys ........................... ..................... 3-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System O p e r a t i o n ................... ............... ... 3 - 4 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Doors and Locks ... ............................... 3-9 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 D e l a y e d L o c k i n g ............................... 3 - 1 0 Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Rear Door Security [...]

Section 3 Features and Controls Park T ilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Object Detection Systems .. ..................... 3-60 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) . . . . . . . . 3-60 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 Universal Home Remote System .. . ........... .. 3-69 Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Keys { W ARNING: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window . Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. The key is used for the ignition and all door locks. The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. See your dealer if a replacement key or additi[...]

If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center . See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry Canada. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this: . Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather . . Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be bloc[...]

/ (Remote V ehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press / to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter . See Remote V ehicle Start on page 3 ‑ 7 for additional information. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q is pressed again within three seconds. See DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 for additional information. Pressing Q arms the content theft ‐ deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3 ‑ 17 . K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only th[...]

Programming T ransmitters to the V ehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer . When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See “ Relearn Remote Key ” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 56 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters [...]

Remote V ehicle Start Y our vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle's heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger . Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. During a remote start, if you[...]

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle. T o manually shut off a remote start, do any of the following: . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off. . T urn on the hazard warning flashers. . T urn the ignition switch on and then off. The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences. The engine will run for 10 minutes after each r[...]

Doors and Locks Door Locks { W ARNING: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. . Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. . Y oung children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) . Outs[...]

Delayed Locking The vehicle may have the delayed locking feature. When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. Y ou will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. Pressing the power lock switch twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors. This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. Y ou can program this feature using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DELA Y DOOR LOCK under DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 . Programmable Automatic Door Locks V ehicles with an automatic lock/unlock fea[...]

When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock, using the power door lock switch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter , if the vehicle has one. 2. Open the door from the outside. T o cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position. Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. If the driver's side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver[...]

T o open a rear access door from the inside, the front door must be opened first. Then, use the handle located on the inside of the rear access door to open. Crew Cabs If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your doors from the inside or outside. Y our vehicle may also have a feature which prevents children from opening the rear doors. See Rear Door Security Locks on page 3 ‑ 10 for more information. T ailgate { W ARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or d[...]

T ailgate Removal The tailgate can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the vehicle. On vehicles with a rear vision camera, it must be disconnected before removing the tailgate. See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 3 ‑ 63 for more information. T o remove the tailgate, do the following: 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. T o release the retaining cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight out. Lift the clip over the bolt, and push the cable forward then rotate down. 2. With the tailgate about half[...]

Windows { W ARNING: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. Manual Windows T urn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows. 3-14[...]

Power Windows { W ARNING: Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window . Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Crew Cab shown If your vehicle has power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors in the front and rear for crew cab and extended cab models. The driver[...]

Express Down Windows V ehicles with the express down feature allow the driver and front passenger windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully on the window switch, then release, to activate the express down mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch. T o open the window partway , press the switch to the first depression position, until the window is at the desired position. Window Lockout o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab or extended cab vehicle has power windows, the driver's door power window switch has a lockout feature. The lockout switch is located in front of the window switches. This feature prevents the rear wind[...]

Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window . The passenger's side sun visor may have a vanity mirror . Theft-Deterrent Systems V ehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Y our vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system. This is the security light. T o arm the theft-deterrent system: 1. Open the door . 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter . The security light should come on and flash. If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will not be activ[...]

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. Y ou should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. T o avoid setting of f the alarm by accident: . If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed. . Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter . Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed. If you set off the alarm by accident, press [...]

P ASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry Canada. P ASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation Y our vehicle has P ASS-Key ® III+ (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. P ASS-Key ® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or ST AR T from the LOCK/OFF position. Y ou do not have to manually arm or disarm the system. The security light will [...]

If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty . See your dealer who can service the P ASS-Key ® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency , contact Roadside Assistance. It is possible for the P ASS-Key ® III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key . Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only . If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service P ASS-Key ® III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service P ASS-Key ® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exact[...]

Starting and Operating Y our V ehicle New V ehicle Break-In Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: . Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). . Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow , for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. . A void making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you[...]

Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions. T o shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied. A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF . On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF . The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center . If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY . If this doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service. Notice: Using a too[...]

D (ST ART): This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key . The ignition switch returns to ON/RUN for driving. A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ OFF and the key is in the ignition. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: . Audio System . Power Windows . OnStar ® System (if equipped) . Sunroof (if equipped) These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY . Once the key is turned from ON/ RUN to LOCK/OFF , the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opene[...]

Starting Procedure 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to ST ART . When the engine starts, let go of the key . The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the ST ART position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the [...]

Fast Idle System Fast Idle System with Switch If the vehicle has this feature it is available only with cruise control. The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand side of the steering wheel. This system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met: . The park brake is set. . The brake pedal is not pressed. . The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed. T o control the fast idle: . T o Enable the Fast idle, press and release the Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that the LED is lit. . For the preset Fast Idle, press and release the cruise set switch. This will set the[...]

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal On vehicles with this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body . Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body . Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving, make only small adjustments. The vehicle may have a memory function which l[...]

T o Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. T urn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is secured to the Engine Compartment Fuse Block with a clip. Carefully remove the wire tie which bundles the electrical plug. Do not cut the electrical cord. 3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet. { W ARNING: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. Y ou could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 1 10-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amp[...]

Automatic T ransmission Operation If the vehicle is a T wo-mode Hybrid, see the T wo-mode Hybrid manual for more information. V ehicles with an automatic transmission have an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster . This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position. There are several different positions for the shift lever . Hydra-Matic ® 4-Speed Automatic T ransmission Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic T ransmission Shown (Light Duty 6 Speed Similar) See “ Range Selection Mode ” later in this section. P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot mo[...]

{ W ARNING: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly . Y ou or others could be injured. T o be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 3 ‑ 51 . If you are pulling a trailer , see T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 . { W ARNING: If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in[...]

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. T o restart when you are already moving, use N (Neutral) only . Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { W ARNING: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly . Y ou could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Be sure the engine is not [...]

The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear . In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally . The transmission uses adaptive shift controls[...]

1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic ® 4-Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. Y ou can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. For an Allison Transmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes. Y ou can use it for major/ severe downgrades and off-road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear app[...]

T o use this feature, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). 2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering column shift lever , to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays next to the M, indicating the current gear . This number is the highest gear that can be used. However , the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the plus/minus button locat[...]

T ow/Haul Mode V ehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow/ haul mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads. The selector button is located on the end of the shift lever . T urn the tow/haul on and off by pressing the button. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See T ow/Haul Mode Light on page 4 ‑ 47 for more information. Also see T ow Haul Mode under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 for more information. T ow/Haul Mode (Allison T ransmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Automatic T r[...]

T urn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing the button, located on the end of the shift lever . When the tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See T ow/Haul Mode Light on page 4 ‑ 47 for more information. Also see “ T ow Haul Mode ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 for more information. Grade Braking (Allison T ransmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Automatic T ransmission) The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever . While in Range Selection Mode , Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears. Grade Braking is only active while the T ow/[...]

Four-Wheel Drive If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. T o get the most satisfaction out of Four-Wheel Drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the following before using Four-Wheel Drive. See the appropriate text for the transfer case in the vehicle. Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time. While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns,[...]

A Four-Wheel Drive indicator light comes on when you shift into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive Light on page 4 ‑ 47 . Some delay between shifting and when the indicator light comes on is normal. Recommended T ransfer Case Settings Driving Conditions T ransfer Case Settings 2 m 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES V ehicle in T ow* YES *See Recreational V ehicle T owing on page 5 ‑ 44 or T owing Y our V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 44 Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can cause premature wear on the vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive for extended period[...]

A parking brake symbol is located next to the N (Neutral) symbol as a reminder to set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case into N (Neutral). { W ARNING: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). Y ou or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle T owing on page 5 ‑ 44 or T owing Y our V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 44 . 2 m (T wo-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway[...]

When Using the Manual T ransfer Case . Shifting should be made using quick motions. Shifting slowly may make it more difficult to shift. . Y ou may notice that it is harder to shift when the vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up the shifting will return to normal. . While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low you may experience reduced fuel economy . . Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean, dry pavement. It may cause your tires to wear faster , make the transfer case harder to shift, and run noisier . . If the transfer case shifter is in the N (Neutral) position and you have difficulty reaching the selected transfer case mode, with the engine running, shift the transmission m[...]

Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low Notice: Shifting the transfer case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while moving at speeds faster than 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause premature wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears to grind. T o avoid causing premature wear , and grinding the gears, do not shift the transfer case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph). Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should be done, if possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll, 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. . Shift the transmission into N (Neutral). { W ARNING: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). Y ou o[...]

Electronic T ransfer Case The transfer case knob is located next to the steering column. Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. Recommended T ransfer Case Settings Driving Conditions T ransfer Case Settings 2 m 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES V ehicle in T ow* YES *See Recreational V ehicle T owing on page 5 ‑ 44 or T owing Y our V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 44 Y ou can choose among four driving settings: Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light flashes[...]

4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting also engages the front axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow . 4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. Y ou may never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. Y ou might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low while driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow , and while climbing or descending steep hills. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn T raction Control and[...]

Shifting Into T wo-Wheel-Drive High T urn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low . See Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low for more information. Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain. T o shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is t[...]

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low T o shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to Four-Wheel-Drive High, or T wo-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or T wo-Wheel-Drive High position. Y ou must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or T wo-Wheel-Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear . Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator lig[...]

7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the transmission to D (Drive) for one second. 8. T urn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY , which will turn the engine off. 9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). 10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle. 1 1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF . Shifting Out of Neutral T o shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral) do the following: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. 2. T urn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off, and shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 3. T urn the transfer case dial to T wo-W[...]

Automatic T ransfer Case The transfer case knob is located next to the steering column. Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-Wheel Drive. Y ou can choose among five driving settings: Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting. 2 m (T wo-Wheel-Drive High): This setting[...]

{ W ARNING: Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). Y ou or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's transfer case to N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See Recreational V ehicle T owing on page 5 ‑ 44 or T owing Y our V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 44 for more information. If the SERVICE 4 – Wheel Drive message stays on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service. See “ Service 4 – Wheel Drive message ” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4[...]

wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear . Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. T o help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear . It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running. If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position when the vehicle is in gear and/or [...]

Shifting into Neutral T o shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following: 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll. 2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 for more information. 3. Shifting the transfer case into N (Neutral) can be done with or without the engine running. Shifting without the engine running should be done with the ignition in ON/RUN. 4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral). 5. Shift the transfer case to T wo-Wheel Drive High. 6. T urn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral) until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds. [...]

Parking Brake Set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 37 . Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. T o release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking brake is n[...]

Shifting Into Park { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly . Y ou or others could be injured. T o be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow . With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 . 1. Hold the brake pedal down,[...]

Leaving the V ehicle With the Engine Running { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. Y ou or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine runni[...]

Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: . Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and . Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery . If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery . See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 44 for more information. T o shift o[...]

Engine Exhaust { W ARNING: Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: . The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). . The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. . The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. . The vehicle ’ s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) . There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fume[...]

Running the V ehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know . { W ARNING: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 54 . { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can ro[...]

Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror . V ehicles with OnStar ® have three additional control buttons for the OnStar ® system. See your dealer for more information about OnStar ® and how to subscribe to it. See the OnStar ® owner guide for more information about the services OnStar ® provides. O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off. The vehicle may also h[...]

Outside T owing Mirrors If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer . Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror's surface is curved to see more from the driver seat. The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver preferred position for better vision. The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Outside Power Mirrors V ehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver door . T o adjust each mirro[...]

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors V ehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have controls located on the driver door . Mirror Adjustment 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: . The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. . They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. . The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position. . The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of t[...]

Park Tilt Mirrors If the vehicle has the memory package, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s) return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off or to OFF/LOCK. T urn this feature on or off through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 for more information. Outside Convex Mirror { W ARNING: A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, [...]

Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) system, it operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground. { W ARNING: The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect: . Objects that are below the bumper , underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from the vehicle . Children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. If you do n[...]

How the System Works URP A comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). A single tone sounds to indicate the system is working. URP A operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). An obstacle is indicated by audible beeps. The interval between the beeps becomes shorter as the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. When the distance is less than 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are continuous. T o be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground and below tailgate level. Objects must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear bumper . This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather . The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disabl[...]

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URP A system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the messages P ARK ASSIST OFF or P ARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL will be displayed on the DIC. SERVICE P ARK ASSIST : If this message occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system. P ARK ASSIST OFF: This message occurs if the driver disables the system. P ARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL: This message can occur under the following conditions: . The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow , ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Y our V ehicle on page 6 ‑ 1 13 . . The park assist sensors [...]

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system. Read this entire section before using it. { W ARNING: The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not replace driver vision. RVC does not: . Detect objects that are outside the camera's field of view , below the bumper , or underneath the vehicle. . Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the RVC screen, or use the screen during longer , higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traffic. Y our judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances. So if you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,[...]

V ehicles With Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed, after a delay . T urning the Rear V ision Camera System On or Off T o turn the rear vision camera system on or off: 1. Shift into P (Park). 2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options, then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button. 3. Select the[...]

Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen T o adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display . Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen. ] (Brightness) : T ouch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen. _ (Contrast) : T ouch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen. Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URP A) system must not be disable[...]

Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located in the bezel for the tailgate handle. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited. The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper . The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides. A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper . 3-66[...]

Disconnecting the Rear Vision Camera T o disconnect the camera: 1. Remove the license plate. 2. Disconnect the camera connectors from the chassis harness, located behind the license plate, by pressing on the release tab on each connector . A. Chassis harness connector B. Release tab C. Camera connector 3. Plug the two exposed chassis harness connectors together to prevent contamination. A. Chassis harness connector B. Release tab 4. Feed the wiring harness through the pickup box, then plug the camara connectors together to prevent contamination. 5. Remove the tailgate. See T ailgate on page 3 ‑ 12 for more information. 6. Re ‐ install the license plate. Reverse this procedure to reinstal[...]

When the System Does Not Seem T o Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if: . The RVC is turned off. See “ Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off ” earlier in this section. . It is dark. . The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. . Ice, snow , mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. . The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer . The rear vision cam[...]

Universal Home Remote System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry Canada. Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below . This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does [...]

Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated. T o program up to three devices: 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “ Learn ” or “ Smart ” [...]

3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light, above the selected button, should slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up to 20 seconds. 4. Immediately , within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. T o program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener , a security device, or home automation device, repeat[...]

T o program up to three devices: 1. T o verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener motor . If there are a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above, the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code. Y our hand held transmitter can have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter . The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit) could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Ho[...]

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar . The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter could be labeled, as follows: . A switch in the up position could be labeled as “ Up, ” “ +, ” or “ On. ” . A switch in the down position could be labeled as “ Down, ” “ − , ” or “ Off. ” . A switch in the middle position could be labeled as “ Middle, ” “ 0, ” or “ Neutral. ” 2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: . When a switch is in the up position, write “ Left. ” . When a switch is in the down positio[...]

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly . Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's Universal Home Remote. Y ou will have two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows: . If you wrote “ Left, ” press the left button in the vehicle. . If you wrote “ Right, ” press the right button in the vehicle. . If you wrote “ Middle, ” press the middle button in the vehicle. 5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. 6. Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garag[...]

Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by repeating the instructions. Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. T o erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device: 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lights, located directly above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly . 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased. For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance[...]

Instrument Panel Storage For vehicles equipped with an instrument panel storage area, it is located above the glove box. Access the storage area by pressing and holding in the driver side of the handle and pull out on the exposed portion of the handle. Center Console Storage V ehicles with an upper and lower center console storage area have cupholders included. Pull the lever (A) up to access the upper storage area. Raise the upper storage bin, then pull the lever (B) up to access the lower storage area. Use the key to lock and unlock the lower storage area. 3-76[...]

Roof Rack System { W ARNING: If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM Certified accessory carrier . For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory . See your dealer for additional information. Notice: Loading car[...]

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 . . If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood to the siderail supports. . T ie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding. T o move a crossrail, lift the release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side. Press the release lever down on both sides of the rail, down[...]

Extended Cab If your vehicle is an extended cab, the sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror . V ent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear of the switch to vent the sunroof. T o close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the switch. Open: From the vent position, the sunroof can be fully opened either manually or by using the express-open feature. T o open manually , press the rear of the switch to the first depression and hold until the sunroof has reached the desired position. T o open using express-open, press the rear of the switch fully and release. The sunroof will move to the full open position. T o stop the sunroof partway , press the swit[...]

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: T o open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver's side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. T o close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver's side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed. Express-Open/Express-Close: T o express-open the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver's side switch. The sunroof will open automatically . T o stop the sunroof partway , press the switch a second time. T o express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the fron[...]

Section 4 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ........ ........... ..... 4-3 Hazard W arning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 T ilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 T urn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Section 4 Instrument Panel Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 F o g L a m p L i g h t ........................... ..... 4 - 4 6 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 T ow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 F u e l G a u g e ..........................[...]

Instrument Panel Overview Hazard W arning Flashers | (Hazard W arning Flasher): Press this button located on top of the steering column, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work. Horn T o sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on the steering wheel. Tilt Wheel The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column. T o adjust the steering wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever . 2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position. 3. Release the lever to lock th[...]

T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : T urn and Lane Change Signals 5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer N : Windshield Wipers L : Windshield W asher Flash-to-Pass. Exterior Lamps. Information for these features is on the pages following. T urn and Lane-Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if tow-haul [...]

T urn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal, if the vehicle has a radio. The message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC). T o turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): T o change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the lever toward the instrument panel. T o return to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on. Flash-to-Pass [...]

Windshield Wipers T urn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers. 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8 , then release. Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer . 9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers of f. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. ? (High Speed): Fast wipes. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 ‑ 63 . Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor . A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it c[...]

Cruise Control { W ARNING: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator . Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off. For vehicles with an Allison ® or Hydra ‐ Matic[...]

The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel. I (On/Off): T urns the system on or off. The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate. SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate. [ (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory . Setting Cruise Control If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control switch off when crui[...]

Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory . Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed and stays there. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already activated, . Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached, then release it. . T o increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster . Redu[...]

Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control: . T o disengage cruise control; step lightly on the brake pedal. . Press [ on the steering wheel. . T o turn off the cruise control, press I on the steering wheel. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is [...]

AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the following: . Parking Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights . T aillamps . License Plate Lamps When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on for a set time. The time of the delay can be changed using the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 49 (If Equipped). ; (Parking Lamps): T urns on the parking lamps together with the following: . Instrument Panel Lights . T aillamps . License Plate Lamps 2 (Headlamps): T urns on the headlamps together with the following: . Parking Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights . T aillamps . License Plate L[...]

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day . Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The DRL system comes on when the following conditions are met: . The ignition is on. . The exterior lamps control is in AUTO. . The engine is running. . The light sensor determines it is daytime. When the DRL system is on, only the DRL lamps are on. The taillamps, sidemarker , instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on. When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp system switches from DRL to the headlamps. T o turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior[...]

If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately . Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that delay , the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 14 . T o idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off, turn the control to the off position. The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center (DIC), if e[...]

Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp. This button is located on the overhead console. When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator . The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps, so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value. The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires [...]

Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control. k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. Entry Lighting The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature. When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will not come on. Exit Lighting The interior lamps come on when the key is removed from the ignition. They turn off automatically in 20 seconds. The lights do not come on if th[...]

Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery . When the battery's state of charge is low , the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed. The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads[...]

Accessory Power Outlet(s) Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located below the climate control system, or may have one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter . The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle closest to the driver . There may be another accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area. If the vehicle has a floor console, there is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear of the floor console. T o use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory power out[...]

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter The vehicle may have a front ashtray located near the center of the instrument panel. Pull on the door to open it. The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter . Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray , hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray . T o remove the ashtray , open the door and pull the ashtray bin toward you. T o replace the ashtray , insert the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door and press down until it engages. T o use the cigarette lighter , push it in all the way , and let go. When it is ready for use, the lighter pops back[...]

T emperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. 9 (Fan Control): T urn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. T urn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between two modes to select a combination of those modes. Select from the following: H (V ent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets[...]

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor , defog or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of these modes, the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. T o clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition. # (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on. The air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch is on. The ai[...]

Climate Control System (With Heater Only) With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled. A. Fan Control B. T emperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control T emperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. 9 (Fan Control): T urn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. T urn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between two modes to select a combination of those modes. Select from the following: H (V ent)[...]

Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. A. Driver and Passenger T emperature Controls B. Fan Control C. AUTO D. Defrost E. Recirculation F . Outside Air G. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. P ASS (Passenger) O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor . This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent o[...]

The passenger's temperature setting can be set to match the driver's temperature setting by pressing the P ASS button and turning off the P ASS indicator . When the passenger's temperature setting is set different than the driver's setting, the indicator on the P ASS button illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown. When in defrost mode the passenger temperature setting cannot be changed. Automatic Operation AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active the system controls the inside temperature, the air delivery , and the fan speed. Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode: 1. Press the AUTO butt[...]

Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load. For more information on the solar sensor , see “ Sensors ” later in this section. T o avoid blowing cold air in cold weather , the system delays turning the fan on until warm air is available. The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch overrides this delay and changes the fan to a selected speed. Manual Operation D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Pressing either fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control. The fan setting r[...]

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly . Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents, with some directed to the floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. The passenger temperature control cannot be activated while in defrost mode. If the P ASS button is pressed, the button indicator flashes three times and will not work. If the passenger temperature buttons are adjusted, the driver temperature indicator changes. The passenger temperature[...]

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor , defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of those modes, the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. T o clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition. ; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode on. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that outside is on. When selected, air from outsid[...]

Sensors The solar sensor , located in the defrost grille, in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly . The interior temperature sensor , located in the headliner , measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle. There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the [...]

Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow . Use the thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the airflow . Operation Tips . Clear away any ice, snow , or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle. . Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively . . Use of non ‐ GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. W arning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators W arning lig[...]

Instrument Panel Cluster United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar . For vehicles with a DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. 4-29[...]

Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Engine Hour Meter Display The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display the number of hours the engine has run. T o display the engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter displays for up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 [...]

Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light flashes for several seconds, then comes on solid for several more. This chime and light sequence are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light, several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the fro[...]

Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag's electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor , the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 2 ‑ 73 . The airbag readiness light comes on solid for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately . { W ARNING: If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working p[...]

When the right front passenger airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on-off switch in the glove box, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been turned off. This light will go off when the airbag has been turned on. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 ‑ 82 for more information, including important safety information. United States Canada { W ARNING: If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sit[...]

{ W ARNING: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. T o help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away . See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 32 for more information, including important safety information. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 ‑ 82 for more information, including important safety information. If, after several seconds, both status indica[...]

United States Canada When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF , or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF , or either the on or of f symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator , it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator , it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal a[...]

Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ST ART , but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer . The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away . If the vehicle must be driven a short dis[...]

Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power . The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range. If the vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner . Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible pro[...]

United States Canada This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem. { W ARNING: The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully . The pedal might be harder to push or might go closer to the floor . It can take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed[...]

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 37 . For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 for all br[...]

Engine Coolant T emperature Gauge United States Canada This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and go over the 235°F (1 13°C) mark. However , if the gauge reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity . See Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 34 . Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides in[...]

When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 76 for more information. Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. This light should come on when t[...]

Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty . This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 ‑ 4 . This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways: Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and coul[...]

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear , misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 7 . If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechani[...]

Oil Pressure Gauge United States Canada For vehicles with an engine oil pressure gauge, it shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity , but if readings are outside the normal operating range, the oil pressure light comes on. See Oil Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 45 for more information. A reading outside the normal operating range can be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as soon as possible. See “ OIL PRESSURE LOW ” under DIC Wa[...]

Oil Pressure Light { W ARNING: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low . The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer . If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine p[...]

Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle's security system, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3 ‑ 17 . Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13 for more information. Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 7 for more information. Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4 ‑ 5 for more information. 4-46[...]

Four-Wheel-Drive Light The four-wheel-drive light comes on when a vehicle with a manual transfer case is shifted into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. Some delay between the shifting and the light coming on is normal. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3 ‑ 36 for more information. T ow/Haul Mode Light For vehicles with the tow/ haul mode feature, this light comes on when the T ow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 34 . Fuel Gauge United States Canada When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge shows about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. The gauge wil[...]

When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 for more information. Here are some situations owners can experience with the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gauge. . At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full. . It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the fuel tank's capacity to fill it. . The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off. For a diesel engine, see “ Fuel Gauge ” in the Diesel Engine Su[...]

Driver Information Center (DIC) Y our vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster . The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay , the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “ DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) ” later in this section and DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 73 for the displays available. If your vehicle does not [...]

DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip/ fuel, vehicle information, customization, and set/ reset buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. 3 (T rip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer , trip odometer , fuel range, average economy , fuel used, timer , instantaneous economy and Active Fuel Management ™ indicator , and transmission temperature. The compass and outside temperature will also be shown in the display . The temperature will be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected. T (V ehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with the T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer br[...]

T rip Odometer Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer . Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer . The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed. Y ou can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem. The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used[...]

Fuel Used Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays. This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item. T o reset the fuel used information, press and hold the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed. Timer Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This display can be used as a timer . T o start the timer , press the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset, not including time the ignition is off. T ime will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC. The tim[...]

V ehicle Information Menu Items T (V ehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display , that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil life is low , the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display . See “ CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON ” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 . Y ou should change the oil[...]

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer for service. T railer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC. Press the vehicle information button until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display . TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. T o adjust this setting, see “ Integrated T railer Brake Control System ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 for more information. OUTPUT shows the power output to the t[...]

Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone. See DIC Compass on page 4 ‑ 60 for more information. Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC Compass on page 4 ‑ 60 for more information. Blank Display This display shows no information. T rip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Use the trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and trip odometer . The Language selection and Engine Hours display can also be accessed with the trip odometer reset stem. Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). T rip Odometer[...]

Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear . T o select a language: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. 2. While in the ODOMETER display , press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays. 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages. The available selections are ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS (French), ESP ANOL (Spanish), and NO CHANGE. 4. Once the desired language is displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice. Engine Hours T o display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in LO[...]

T rip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear . T o select a language: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. 2. While in the ODOMETER display , press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays. 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages. The available languages are ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS (French), ESP ANOL (Spanish), and NO CHANGE. 4. Once the desired language is displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice. T rip Odometer Press the trip o[...]

T ransmission T emperature Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP displays. This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C). T railer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display . TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. T o adjust this setting, see “ Integrated T railer Brake Control System ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 for[...]

Remember , you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. T o reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 . Relearn Tire Positions Y our vehicle may have this display . T o access this display , the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions. T o re-learn the tire positions, see Tire P[...]

DIC Compass Y our vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory . Y our dealer will set the correct zone for your location. Under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or province, it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly . Compass variance is the difference between the earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may give false readings. The compass must be set to the variance zone in [...]

2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance zone number on the map. Zones 1 through 15 are available. 3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. 4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. Or , if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed. 5. If calibration is necessary , calibrate the compass. See “ Compass Calibration Procedure ” following. 4-61[...]

Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location, such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger . It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other industrial structures, if possible. If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display , the compass should be calibrated. If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example, N for North, or the heading does not change after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a magnet[...]

DIC W arnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another . Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display . Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. Y ou should take any messages that appear on the d[...]

CHECK TRAILER WIRING On vehicles with the Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists: . A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle. ‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped, this message clears itself after a short time. ‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message stays on until the ignition is turned off. . There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes. When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of [...]

ENGINE OVERHEA TED IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur . If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 34 for more information. This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant T emperature Gauge on page 4 ‑ 40 . See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 ‑ 36 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency . ENGINE OVERHEA TED STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is [...]

HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime may sound if the hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab) This message displays and a chime may sound if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the[...]

P ASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime may sound if the front passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message may display while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See “ Matching Transmitter(s) to Y our V ehicle ” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 4 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 56 for more i[...]

SERVICE BA TTER Y CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster . See Charging System Light on page 4 ‑ 36 . Driving with this problem could drain the battery . Turn of f all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer . SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 37 . If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. R[...]

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine. See P ASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 3 ‑ 19 for more information. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly . The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 40 . Several conditions may cause this message to appear . See Tire Pressure Monitor Operat[...]

ST ABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliT rak, this message displays when you turn off StabiliT rak, or when the stability control has been automatically disabled. T o limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave StabiliT rak on. However , you should turn StabiliT rak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your V ehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5 ‑ 27 . T o turn the StabiliT rak system on or off, see StabiliT rak ® System on page 5 ‑ 6 . [...]

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the system is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See “ DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) ” earlier in this section for more information. The tire positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor . See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 80 , Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 ‑ 75 , and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 for more information. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehi[...]

TRAILER CONNECTED On vehicles with the Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message clears itself after several seconds. This message also clears if you acknowledge it. After this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in the DIC. See “ TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT ” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 56 and “ Integrated T railer Brake Control System ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 for more information. TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you dri[...]

DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) Y our vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC. The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory , but may have been changed from their default state since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. T o change customization preferences,[...]

DISPLA Y LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear . Press the customization button until the DISPLA Y LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English. FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. ESP ANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. Y ou can also ch[...]

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3 ‑ 10 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. DRIVER A T KEY OUT : Only the driver's door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. DRIVER IN P ARK: Only the drive[...]

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter . Y ou will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 4 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this featur[...]

EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF . Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to[...]

CHIME VOLUME If available, this feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. [...]

EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: DOOR BUTTON ONL Y : No automatic seat exit recall will occur . The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button. BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the driver's seat will mov[...]

MEMOR Y SEA T RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Press the customization button until MEMORY SEA T RECALL appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur . ON: The driver's seat and, on some vehicles, the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitte[...]

F ACTOR Y SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Press the customization button until F ACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEA TURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to[...]

Audio System(s) Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features. { W ARNING: T aking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving. This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. T o minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 . Notice: C[...]

3. Press the H button until the minute numbers begin to flash, then turn the f knob to increase or decrease the minutes. 4. Press the H button until the 12HR or 24HR time format begins to flash, then turn the f knob to change the time format. 5. Press the H button again until the clock display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time, or wait until the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed automatically sets. MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player T o set the time and date: 1. T urn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on. 2. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour , m[...]

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player T o set the time and date: 1. T urn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour , minute, month, day , and year). 4. Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change that setting. 5. T o increase the time or date, do one of the following: . Press the softkey below the selected tab. . Press the ¨ SEEK button. . Press the FWD button. . T urn the f knob clockwise. 6. T o decrease the time or date, do one of the following: . Press the © SEEK button. . Press the s REV button. . T urn the f knob counterclockwise.[...]

Radio(s) AM-FM Radio Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with USB and CD (MP3), and Radio with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar 4-85[...]

Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system. Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose ® Surround Sound System. Some of its features are explained later in this section under , “ Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ” . If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4 ‑ 132 for more information on the vehicle's RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Syst[...]

Radio Data System (RDS) For radios with the Radio Data System (RDS) feature, it only works with FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters displays. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly . If this happens, contact the radio station. Playing the Radio O (Power/V olume): Press to turn the system on and off. T urn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. (Information) (AM-FM Radio): Press[...]

Finding a Station BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM ™ , if equipped. f (T une): Turn to select radio stations. © SEEK ¨ : Press either arrow to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there. The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. T o scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. For the AM-FM Radio, the station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode. For the AM-FM Radio, scan presets within the current selected band by pressing and holding[...]

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Radios that have a F A V button store radio stations as favorites. Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked. T une to favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 . F A V (Favorites): If the vehicle has a F A V button, a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the F A V button. Press the F A V button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of [...]

Setting the T one (Bass/T reble) (AM-FM Radio) Bass/T reble: T o adjust the bass or treble, press the tune knob or the EQ button until the desired tone control tab displays. T urn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting. The display shows the current bass or treble level. If a station's frequency is weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble. Setting the T one (Bass/Midrange/T reble) (All Except AM-FM Radio) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or T reble): T o adjust bass, midrange, or treble: 1. Press the f knob until the tone control tabs display . 2. Highlight the desired tone control tab by doing one of the following: . Pressing the f knob. .[...]

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL/F ADE (Balance/Fade): T o adjust balance or fade on radios without a ` button, press the f knob until the speaker control tabs display . Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey under the desired tab. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting, or adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow , FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained. T o quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the softkey positioned under the BAL or F ADE tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. T o quickly adjust[...]

3. T urn the f knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category . 4. T o exit the category search mode, press the F A V button or BAND button to display the favorites again. Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu. T o remove an undesired category: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the softkey located below the XM CA T tab. 3. T urn the f knob to display the category to be removed. 4. Press the softkey located under the Remove tab until the category name along with the word Removed displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remo[...]

Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the CD or DVD player . If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player , use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, a[...]

Inserting a CD (Single CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Inserting a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player . This CD player holds up to six CDs. T o insert one CD: 1. Press and release the ^ button. 2. W ait for the message to insert the disc. 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in. T o insert multiple CDs: 1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. 2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs. 3. Press the ^ button again [...]

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing (loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing). If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player , it stays in the player . When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4 ‑ 141 for more information. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the[...]

For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a redu[...]

RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FM Radio with CD, press and release the RPT button to repeat the current track. An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play . BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening. For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in the player . Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliar[...]

Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack. Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers. Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/ CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available). If a playback device is plugged into the radio ’ s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the veh[...]

Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other messages when an error occurs: Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down. Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format. Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems. . It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play . . The road is very rough. When the road becomes smoother , the CD should play . . The CD is dirty , scratched, wet, or upside down. . The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. . There could have been a problem while burning the CD. . The label could be caught in the CD player . If the CD is not playing correctly , for any other reason, [...]

Playing a DVD DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player . If a portable audio player is not connected, “ No Aux Input Device ” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate “ No Aux Input Device ” . If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as:[...]

FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed. T o stop fast forwarding, press again. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several ta[...]

Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus. q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active. DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the softkeys located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after , for more information. The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus and controls through the remote control. See “ Remote Control ” , under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4 ‑ 132 for more information. The [...]

Stopping and Resuming Playback T o stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, press the c button on the remote control, or press the softkey located under the stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD-V , press the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. T o resume DVD playback, press the r / j button on the remote control, or press the softkey located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the sto[...]

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 for more information on driver distraction. T o use a portable audio player , connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers. For optimal sound quality , increase the portable audio device's volume to the loudest level. It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing. O (Power/V olume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the porta[...]

USB Support The USB connector is located on the dashboard or in the center console, and uses the USB 2.0 standard. USB Supported Devices . USB Flash Drives . Portable USB Hard Drives . Fifth generation or later iPod . iPod nanos . iPod touch . iPod classic Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port. Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple ® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes ® application. See www .apple.com/itunes. For help with identifying your iPod, go to www .apple.com/support. Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) Format Radios that have the capability of playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a[...]

CD ‐ R or CD ‐ RW Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 50 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 50 playlists. . Up to 255 files. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 700 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 65,535 files. . Folder and file names up to 64 bytes. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension. . AAC files stored on an iPod. . F A T16 . F A T32 Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder . Files are stored in the root directory when the disc or storage device does not contain folders. Files accessed[...]

File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. T rack names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename is not displayed. Preprogrammed Playlists CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp ™ , MusicMatch ™ , or Real Jukebox ™ software can be accessed, however , there is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These playlists are treated as special fo[...]

c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to go to the first track in the next folder . RDM (Random): MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order , on one CD-R or CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CD player . T o use random, press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc or Randomize All Discs displays to play songs from the current CD or all CDs in random order . Press the same softkey again to turn off random play . h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h to have the files played in order by artist or album. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes[...]

Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod ® The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB storage device. T o connect a USB storage device, connect the device to the USB port located in the center console or on the instrument panel. T o connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable that came with the iPod to the iPod ’ s dock connector and connect the other end to the USB port located in the center console or on the instrument panel. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works, “ OK to disconnect ” and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio display . The iPod music appears on the radio ’ s display and begins playing. The iPod charges while it i[...]

Using Softkeys to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The five softkeys below the radio display are used to control the functions listed below . T o use the softkeys: 1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display to display the functions listed below , or press the softkey below the function if it is currently displayed. 2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on it to use that function. j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used. Press the softkey below j again to resume playback. Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory on a USB[...]

h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are sorted by: . Playlists . Artists . Albums . Genres . Songs . Composers T o select files: 1. Press the softkey below h . 2. T urn f to scroll through the list of menus. 3. Press f to select the desired menu. 4. T urn f to scroll through the folders or files in the selected menu. 5. Press f to select the desired file to be played. T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through[...]

Shuffle Functionality T o use Shuffle: Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder . > (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected. 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB storage device or iPod. < (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod. = (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage device. Using an MP3 (Radios[...]

CD ‐ R or CD ‐ RW Supported File and Folder Structure The DVD Player supports: . Up to 255 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 15 playlists. . Up to 40 sessions. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. The CD Player supports: . Up to 512 files and folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 700 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 65,535 files. . Folder and file names up to 64 bytes. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension. . AAC files stored on an iPod. . F[...]

Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the player advances to the next folder that contains files. No Folder When the disc contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root folder . The next and previous folder function does not function on a disc that was recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT . When the disc contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the root folder . The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists first and then goes to the root folder . When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays R[...]

Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp ™ , MusicMatch ™ , or Real Jukebox ™ software can be accessed, however , they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port. Playing an MP3/WMA File From a Disc (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only). f (T une): Turn to select MP3/WMA files. © SEEK: Press to go [...]

When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display . Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist. T o listen to files by another artist, press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order . Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the artist displays. T o change from playback by artist to playback by album: 1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab. 2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from the sort [...]

Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio ’ s display . f (T une): Turn to select files. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly . Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. FW[...]

c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. T o browse and select files: 1. Press the softkey below c . 2. T urn f to scroll through the list of folders. 3. Press f to select the folder . If there is more than one folder , repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the folder is reached. 4. T urn f to scroll through the files in the selected folder . 5. Press f to select the file to be played. T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through the list each time [...]

T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fourth softkey , 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fifth softkey , end of the list. Repeat Functionality T o use Repeat: Press the softkey below " or ' to select between Repeat All and Repeat T rack. " (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or[...]

XM Radio Messages XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly , but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM ™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly . Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tun[...]

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer . XM Not A vailable: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer . Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Bluetooth ® V ehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The system can be used while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support [...]

Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 ‑ 143 for more information. b g (Push T o T alk) : Press to answer incoming calls, to confirm system information, and to start speech recognition. c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a call, or to cancel an operation. Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be ma[...]

Pairing a Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Bluetooth ” . The system responds with “ Bluetooth ready ” followed by a tone. 3. Say “ Pair ” . The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number . The PIN number will be used in Step 4. 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process. Locate the device named “ General Motors ” in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3. 5. T[...]

Linking to a Different Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Bluetooth ” . The system responds with “ Bluetooth ready ” followed by a tone. 3. Say “ Change phone ” . The system responds with “ Please wait while I search for other phones ” . . If another phone is found, the response will be “ <Phone name> is now connected ” . . If another phone is not found, the original phone remains connected. Storing Name T ags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems. The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve ph[...]

4. After the system stores the phone number , it responds with “ Please say the name tag ” followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone number . The name tag is recorded and the system responds with “ About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK? ” . . If the name tag does not sound correct, say “ No ” and repeat Step 5. . If the name tag sounds correct, say “ Y es ” and the name tag is stored. After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu. Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually . 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” fol[...]

Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system. T o use the directory command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Directory ” . The system responds with “ Directory ” and then plays back all of the stored name tags. When the list is complete, the system returns to the main menu. Deleting Name T ags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags: . Delete . Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted. T o use the delete command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with [...]

Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands: . Dial . Digit Dial . Call . Re ‐ dial Using the Dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Dial ” . The system responds with “ Dial using <phone name> ” . “ Number please ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the entire number without pausing. . If the system recognizes the number , it responds with “ OK, Dialing ” and dials the number . . If the system does not recognize the number , it confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the number is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, Dialing ” and dials the number . [...]

Using the Call Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Call ” . The system responds with “ Call using <phone name>. Please say the name tag ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag of the person to call. . If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with “ OK, calling, <name tag> ” and dials the number . . If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, calling, <name tag> ” and dials the number . If the name tag is not correct, say “ No[...]

Call W aiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. . Press b g to answer an incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold. . Press b g again to return to the original call. . T o ignore the incoming call, continue with the original call with no action. . Press c x to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold. Three ‐ W ay Calling Three ‐ W ay Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. 1. While on a call press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Three ‐ way call ” . The[...]

T ransferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone. T o T ransfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle: 1. Press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ T ransfer Call. ” The system responds with “ T ransferring call ” and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone. T o T ransfer Audio to the In-V ehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY position. During a[...]

Sending a Number During a Call 1. Press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Dial ” . The system responds with “ Say a number to send tones ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the number to send. . If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with “ OK, Sending Number ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. . If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly , it responds “ Dial Number , Please say yes or no? ” followed by a tone. If the number is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, Sending Number ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. Sending a Stored Name T ag During a[...]

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle's audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player , a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 85 for more information on the vehicle's audio/DVD system. Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only . The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so. In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the [...]

Headphones The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones can used to listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light does not come on, the b[...]

Battery Replacement T o change the batteries on the headphones, do the following: 1. T urn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly , using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw . If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console, allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcord[...]

T o use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary . See Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 85 for more information. How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu. T o chang[...]

Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. T o use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push the release button located on the overhead console. 2. Move the screen to the desired position. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen remains on. This is normal, and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source. Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen. The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control. They are located at the re[...]

Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen on and off. P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on. v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for each disc. y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): [...]

u (Next T rack/Chapter): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse the DVD or CD. T o stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the play/pause button. T o stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD. T o stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the play/pause button. T o stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward [...]

Battery Replacement T o change the remote control batteries, do the following: 1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the remote control. 3. Replace the battery cover . If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Tips and T roubleshoo ting Chart Problem Recommended Action No power . The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in ACC/ ACCESSORY . The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out. Check the d[...]

Tips and T roubleshoo ting Chart (cont'd) Problem Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player . DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on the radio that is in the vehicle. The video screen can displa[...]

Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water . Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water . Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) V ehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However , the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat passe[...]

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off. V olume: Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM ™ (if equipped), CD, and if the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary , and rear auxiliary . © ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM ™ (if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold ei[...]

While a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the CD or DVD audio. While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer , press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter . Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK ® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the V ehicle Identification Numb[...]

Radio T o select preset or favorite radio stations: Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset or favorite. CD/DVD T o select tracks on a CD/DVD: Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous track. Select tracks on an iPod or USB Device (V ehicles without a Navigation System) 1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display . 2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the list, then press and hold w , or press ¨ to play the highlighted track. Navigating folders on an iPod or USB Device (V ehicles without a Navigation System): 1. Press and hold w or x while lis[...]

Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Main Audio Screen (V ehicles with a Navigation System) Press and release w or x to select the next or previous track within the selected category . Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the tracks. Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the selected category . Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Music Navigator Screen (V ehicles with a Navigation System) Press and release w or x to select the next or previous track within the selected category . Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the tracks within the selected category . Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the selected category . b g (Mute/Push to T alk): P[...]

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM ™ . For vehicles with or without a navigation system: Press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press ¨ to select a track or a folder when navigating folders on an iPod or USB device. For vehicles with a navigation system: 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is heard, to place the radio into SCAN mode, a station will play for five seconds before moving to the next station. 2. T o stop the SCAN function, press ¨ again. While listening to a CD/DVD, press and hold ¨ to quickly move forward through the tracks. Release to stop on the desired track. + e − e (V olume): Press to increa[...]

XM ™ Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's battery , or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of sta[...]

2 NOTES 4-148[...]

Section 5 Driving Y our V ehicle Y our Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 D r u n k D r i v i n g ................................. .. 5 - 2 Control of a V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 B r a k i n g ... ...................................... 5 - 3 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 StabiliT rak ® S y s t e m ............................. 5 - 6 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Steering . [...]

Y our Driving, the Road, and the V ehicle Defensive Driving Defensive driving means “ always expect the unexpected. ” The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 16 . { W ARNING: Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready . In addition: . Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you. . Focus on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. Drunk Dr[...]

For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological, and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Control of a V ehicle The following three systems help to c[...]

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking, rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake assist but it will be[...]

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely . Suddenly , an animal jumps out in front of you. Y ou slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly . Remember: ABS does not change the time neede[...]

StabiliT rak ® System The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliT rak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliT rak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems. The system may be heard or fe[...]

The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. The traction control part of StabiliT rak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliT rak button if both systems (traction control and StabiliT rak) were previously on. T o disable both TCS and StabiliT rak, press and hold the button for five seconds. TCS and StabiliT rak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliT rak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason. When TCS or StabiliT rak is turned off, the StabiliT rak light and the appropriate message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver . The vehicle will still have brake-traction control when[...]

In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely . This can cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly . Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliT rak, ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed, the transfer case could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and messages are displayed. The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the tra[...]

T ry to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. W ait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway . Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. The vehicle can perf[...]

Off-Road Recovery The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy . Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way , steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. T urn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway . Passing Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. T o reduce the risk of danger while passing: . Look down the road, to the sides, and to cross[...]

Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Remember: StabiliT rak ® helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See StabiliT rak ® System on page 5 ‑ 6 . If the StabiliTrak ® System i[...]

Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery , rough, uphill, or downhill. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off ‐ road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover . Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. Before Y ou Go Off-Roading . Have all necessary maintenance and service work done. . Make sure there is[...]

Loading Y our V ehicle for Off-Road Driving { W ARNING: . Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. Y ou or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. . Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. Y ou or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly . . Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's center of gravity , making it more likely to roll over . Y ou can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over . Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and lo[...]

. T ake extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns. . Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle's exhaust system. T raveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads. It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one of them. For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck but yo[...]

Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow , or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle's steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways. Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking distances can occur . Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow , or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Some things to consider: . Is the path ahead clear? . Will the surface texture change abr[...]

Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. Consider this as you approach a hill: . Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? . Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? . Is there a straight path up or down the hi[...]

. Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there. . Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic. { W ARNING: Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. Y ou could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill: . Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake. . If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to R (Rever[...]

If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear . { W ARNING: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. Y ou or someone else could be injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking[...]

. Never go downhill with the transmission in N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. V ehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill, but if it happens when going downhill: 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and apply the parking brake. 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the engine. 3. Shift back to a low gear , release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help. Driving Across an Incline An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. T o decide whether to try to drive across the incline, consider the following:[...]

If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent this is to “ walk the course ” first, so you know what the surface is like before driving it. Stalling on an Incline { W ARNING: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over , you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. [...]

{ W ARNING: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Y our vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only . Driving in W ater { W ARNING: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water , it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over . Do not drive through rushing water . Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Fi[...]

Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Night driving tips include: . Drive defensively . . Do not drink and drive. . Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror . . Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead. . W atch for animals. . When tired, pull off the road. . Do not wear sunglasses. . Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps. . Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. . Keep your eyes moving, especially during tur[...]

Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water . This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Other Rainy Weather T ips Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: . Allow extra following distance. . Pass with caution. . Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. . Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. . Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 6 ‑ 64 [...]

Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: . Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. . Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear . { W ARNING: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. Y ou would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. Y ou could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. { W ARNING: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes[...]

Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. T ry not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even mor[...]

Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby . If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . T o get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe: . T urn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . . T ie a red cloth to an outside mirror . { W ARNING: Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exh[...]

T o save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. If Y our V ehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the v[...]

Rocking Y our V ehicle to Get It Out T urn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shift into Four ‐ Wheel High. For vehicles with StabiliT rak ® , turn the traction control part of the system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear , spinning the wheels as little as possible. T o prevent transmission wear , wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear . Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the ve[...]

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Y our vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty . For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. Loading the V ehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry . This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-i nstalled options. T wo labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry , the T ire and Loading Information label and the Certification /T ire label. { W ARNING: Do not l[...]

Tire and Loading Information Label Label Example A vehicle specific T ire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. The T ire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6 ‑ 64 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 . There is also imp[...]

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity . For example, if the “ XXX ” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer , the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of y[...]

Example 2 Item Description T otal A V ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight @ 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (340 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (1 13 kg) Example 3 Item Description T otal A V ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight @ 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) 5-32[...]

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver , passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/T ire label is found on the rear edge of the driver's door . The label shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification/Tire labe[...]

The Certification/Tire label also contains important information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity . See “ What is front axle reserve capacity , and how do I calculate it? ” under Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 5 ‑ 37 . { W ARNING: In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured. { W ARNING: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GA WR). If you do, parts on th[...]

{ W ARNING: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. . Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. T ry to spread the weight evenly . . Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. . Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. . When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. . Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See “ Loading Y our V ehicle for Off-Road Driving “ under Off-Road Driving on page 5 ‑ 1 1 . T wo-Tiered[...]

Add-On Equipment When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment. Notice : Overloadin g the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Do not overload the vehicle. Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. * Equipment Maximum Weight Ladder Rack and Cargo 750 lbs (340 kg) Cross T oolbox and Cargo 400 lbs (181 kg) Side Boxes and Cargo 250 lbs per side (1 13 kg per side) * The combined weight for all rail ‐ mounted equipment should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg). Loading Points [...]

aftermarket equipment. See gmupfitter .com for additional pick-up box load bearing structural information. Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on the vehicle, here are some things you need to know: Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by warranty . Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow , do not add one to your vehicle. If your vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. Y our vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the[...]

Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: . Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each. . For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving. . Follow the snow plow manufacturer's recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio, even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating. . The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist you in [...]

In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory , such as a snow plow , is adding to the front axle, use the following formula: (W x (A + W .B.)) /W .B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle. Where: W = Weight of added accessory A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W .B. = V ehicle Wheelbase For example, adding a 318 kg (700 lb) snow plow actually adds more than 318 kg (700 lbs) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 305 cm (10 ft), then: W = 318 kg (700 lb) A = 122 cm (4 ft) W .B. = 305 cm (10 ft) (W x (A + W .B.))/W .B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 445 kg (980 lb[...]

Y ou can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo toward the rear . This has the effect of reducing the load on the front. However , the front GA WR, rear GA WR, and the Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be exceeded. { W ARNING: On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment, such as a snow plow , it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance. If your brakes can not work properly , you could have a crash. T o help your brakes work properly when a snow[...]

T ruck-Camper Loading Information A vehicle specific T ruck ‐ Camper Loading information label is attached to the inside of your vehicle's glove box. This label will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper , how much of a load your vehicle can carry , and how to correctly spread out the load. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper , the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper , plus the following: . Everything else added to the camper after it left the factory . Everything in the camper . All the people inside The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle [...]

Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: A. Camper Center of Gravity B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone When the truck is used to carry a slide ‐ in camper , the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper . The total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating and the camper's center of gravity (A) should fall within the truck's recommended center of gravity zone (B) when installed. Y ou must weigh any access[...]

Open the driver's door and look at the Certification/Tire label to find out your vehicle's GA WRs and GVWR. If your vehicle has gone over the weight ratings, move or take out some things until all the weight falls below the ratings. Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck ‐ camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GA WR). The total axle loads should not exceed your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certifi[...]

T owing T owing Y our V ehicle T o avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . T o tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, see “ Recreational V ehicle T owing ” following. Recreational V ehicle T owing If the vehicle has a two – mode hybrid engine, see the T wo – mode Hybrid manual for more information. Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreation[...]

Dinghy T owing T wo-Wheel-Drive V ehicles Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Four-Wheel-Drive V ehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle: 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park). 5-45[...]

2. T urn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake. 3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “ Shifting into Neutral ” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 3 ‑ 36 for the proper procedure to select the Neutral position for the vehicle. 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing ve[...]

Dolly T owing Front T owing (Front Wheels Off the Ground) T wo-Wheel-Drive V ehicles Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. T o dolly tow a two ‐ wheel ‐ drive vehicle, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly . See “ Rear T owing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) ” later in this section for more informati[...]

Four-Wheel-Drive V ehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly . 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park). 4. Firmly set the parking brake. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are [...]

Rear T owing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) T wo ‐ Wheel ‐ Drive V ehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly . 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. T urn the ignition to LOCK/OFF . 5-49[...]

Four ‐ Wheel ‐ Drive V ehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly . 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the tra[...]

T owing a T railer If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. If the vehicle has a two – mode hybrid engine, see the T wo – mode Hybrid manual for more information. Do not tow a trailer during break ‐ in. See New Vehicle Break-In on page 3 ‑ 21 for more information. { W ARNING: The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly . For example, if the trailer is too heavy , the brakes may not work well or even at all. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warr[...]

Pulling A T railer Here are some important points: . There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. . Consider using a sway control. See “ Hitches ” later in this section. . Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. . During the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and oth[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 4,800 lbs (2 177 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L LMG V8 3.08 6,600 lbs (2 994 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L LMG V8, K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 9,100 lbs (4 128 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 10,00[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 6.2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.42 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Fifth-Wheel T railer 3.73 10,200 lbs (4 627 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.73 10,700 lbs (4 853 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c) 4.8L V8 3.23 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 (LMG) 3.08 6,100 lbs (2 767 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 (LMG) K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (XFE) 3.08 7,[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic 3.42 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel T railer 3.42 8,800 lbs (3 992 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.42 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b) 5.3L V8 3.08 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel T railer 3.42 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Coolin[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg) 1 1,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5.3L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.08 6,100 lbs (2 767 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 — Conventional Trailer 3.08 6,100 lbs (2 767 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 9,600 lbs (4 354 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 6.2L V8 (c) 3.42 6,400 lbs (2 903 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 6.2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel T railer 3.42 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 6.2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.42 9,400 lbs[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.73 10,400 lbs (4 717 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 5,800 lbs (2 631 kg) 1 1,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5.3L V8 3.08 6,300 lbs (2 858 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel T railer 3.42 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional T railer 3.42 9,800 lbs (4 445 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b) 5.3L[...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 12,500 lbs (5 670 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 12,500 lbs (5 670 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 9,900 lbs (4 491 kg) 12,400 lbs (5 625 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d) [...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 9,800 lbs (4 445 kg) 12,300 lbs (5 579 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 12,100 lbs (5 489 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,900 lbs (4 491 kg) 12,400 lbs (5 625 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 [...]

V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR (a) 3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 12,100 lbs (5 489 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,200 lbs (4 173 kg) 1 1,700 lbs (5 307 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,400 lbs (4 264 kg) 1 1,900 lbs (5 398 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,100 lbs (4 128 kg) 1 1,600 lbs (5 262 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) (a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of th[...]

Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8 ‑ 6 for more information. Weight of the T railer T ongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is very important because it is also part of the vehicle weight. The Gross V ehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight. V ehicle options, equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry , which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow . See “ Loading the V ehicle[...]

V ehicle Series Hitch T ype Maximum T ongue Weight 3500 Single Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Gooseneck 1 360 kg (3,000 lbs) 3500 Dual Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Gooseneck 1 587 kg (3,500 lbs) Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle. T railering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight. T ongue or kingpin weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross V ehicle Weight Rating) or the RGA WR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). See “ T otal Weight on the V ehicle's Tires [...]

Hitches The correct hitch equipment helps maintain combination control. Most small-to-medium trailers can be towed with a weight carrying hitch which simply features a coupler latched to the hitch ball. Larger trailers may require a weight distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight among the two vehicle and trailer axles. Fifth wheel and gooseneck hitches may also be used. See “ Weight of the Trailer T ongue ” earlier in this section for rating limits with various hitch types. If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper [...]

Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck T railering Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with many pickup models. These trailers place a larger percentage of the weight (kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle than conventional trailers. Make sure this weight does not cause the vehicle to exceed GA WR or GVWR. Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the maximum amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle. See “ Weight of the Trailer ” in this section for more information. The hitch should be located in the pickup bed so that its centerline is over or slightly in front of the rear axle. T ake care that it is not so far forward tha[...]

This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow/ haul mode is on. T ow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 34 for more information. T ow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “ Weight of the T railer ” later in the section. T ow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: . When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain. . When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic. . Whe[...]

Integrated T railer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system for electric trailer brakes. This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle ’ s brake system. This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations. The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle ’ s brake, anti ‐ lock brake and StabiliT rak (if equipped) systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle ’ s anti ‐ lock brake or Stabi[...]

When trailering, make sure of the following: . The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are equipped with electric brakes. . All applicable local and federal laws and regulations are followed. . All electrical and mechanical connections to the trailer are made correctly . . The trailer ’ s brakes are in proper working condition. . The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the towing condition. The ITBC system is a factory installed item. Out ‐ of ‐ factory installation of this system should not be attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty or performance of the system resulting from out ‐ of ‐ factory installation. T railer Brake Control Panel A. Manual T railer Bra[...]

The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as trailer gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes. T railer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle ’ s Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 for more information. The display page indicates T railer Gain setting, power output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection and system operational status. The T railer Brake Display Pa[...]

The T railer Output will indicate “ - ----- “ on the T railer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur: . No trailer is connected. . A trailer without electric brakes is connected (no DIC message is displayed). . A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be displayed on the DIC). . There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be displayed on the DIC). . There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also be displayed in the DIC). Manual T railer Brake Apply The Manual T railer Brake Apply Lever is located on the T railer Brake [...]

3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer equipped with electric brakes: . A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be briefly displayed on the DIC display . . The T railer Brake Display Page will appear on the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT . . In the Trailer Output display on the DIC, “ - - - - - - “ will disappear if there is no error present. Connecting a trailer without electric brakes will not clear the six dashed lines. 4. Adjust the T railer Gain by using the gain adjustment (+ / -) buttons on the T railer Brake Control Panel. 5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at abo[...]

CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be displayed if: 1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle. If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary , this message will automatically turn off in about thirty seconds. This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer harness is re-connected. If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message will continue until the ignition is turned off. This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer harness is re-connected. 2. There is a[...]

An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer . However , any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty . Please contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information. Driving with a T railer { W ARNING: When towing a trailer , exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. T o maximize safety when towing a trailer: . Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary r[...]

Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer . This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer . The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. T o move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. T o move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making T urns Notice: Making very sharp tur[...]

Parking on Hills { W ARNING: Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface. If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). 5[...]

Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine 3. Shift into a gear 4. Release the parking brake 5. Let up on the brake pedal. 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When T railer T owing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer . See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip. Check periodically to see [...]

Heavy-DutyT railer Wiring Harness Package For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering, the harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: . Y ellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal . Dark Green: Right Stop/T urn Signal . Brown: T aillamps . White: Ground . Light Green: Back-up Lamps . Red: Battery Feed* . Dark Blue: T railer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center , but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center . The fuse and wire for the ITBC is factory installed and connected if the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC. [...]

Camper/Fifth-Wheel T railer Wiring Package The seven-wire camper harness is located under the front edge of the pickup box on the drivers side of the vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector must be added to the wiring harness which connects to the camper . The harness contains the following camper/trailer circuits: . Y ellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal . Dark Green: Right Stop/T urn Signal . Brown: T aillamps . White: Ground . Light Green: Back-up Lamps . Red: Battery Feed . Dark Blue: T railer Brake If the vehicle is equipped with the “ Heavy-Duty T railering ” option, please refer to “ Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package ” earlier in this section. When the camper-wiring harnes[...]

Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller . The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column for the trailer brake controller . The harness contains the following wires: . Dark Blue: Brake Signal to T railer Connector . Red/Black: Battery . Light Blue/White: Brake Switch . White: Ground It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center . If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed, the IT[...]

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Service ......... ........................... ......... 6-4 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 California Perchlorate Materials R e q u i r e m e n t s ................................. 6 - 5 Doing Y our Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Fuel .............................................. ... 6-6 Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Gasoline Specification[...]

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 H e a d l a m p s .................................... 6 - 5 7 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker L a m p s ....................................... 6 - 5 9 T aillamps, T urn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up L a m p s ....................................... 6 - 6 0 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Replacement Bulbs[...]

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 15 T i r e s ................................. ......... 6 - 1 1 6 Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 V ehicle Identification ............................ 6-1 17 V ehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 17 Service Parts Identification Label . . . . .[...]

Service For service and parts needs, visit your dealer . Y ou will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety , including such things as airbags, braking, stability , ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability , and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty . Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installati[...]

California Proposition 65 W arning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary . For additional information, see www .dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Doing Y our Own Servi[...]

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 7 ‑ 17 . Adding Equipment to the Outside of the V ehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Fuel For diesel engine vehicles, see “ Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System ” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this. Gasoline Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of thi[...]

If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0), the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine (VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2), you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 9 . In all other gasoline engines, use only unleaded gasoline. See Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 7 . Gasoline Octane For all vehicles except those with the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher . If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a ga[...]

California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog ‐ check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 41 . If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel use[...]

Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit ‐ related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier . However , E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered [...]

Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website (www .eere.energy .gov/ afdc/infrastructure/locator .html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. T o ens[...]

Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty . Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Cost[...]

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability , the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 9 . T o remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. { W ARNING: Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly . If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather . Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way . If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model, [...]

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 for more information. { W ARNING: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately . Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Y our dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly . This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 41 . Fil[...]

Checking Things Under the Hood { W ARNING: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { W ARNING: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber . Y ou or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 6-14[...]

Hood Release T o open the hood: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the left of the brake pedal. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release. This is located under the hood, near the center of the grille. 3. Push the secondary hood release to the right. 4. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly . Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position, pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 6-15[...]

Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an Allison Transmission, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. 5.3 L V8 Engine (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine and 6.2 L V8 Engine similar): 6-16[...]

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 21 . B. Coolant Surge T ank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6 ‑ 29 . C. Positive (+) T erminal. See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 44 . D. Battery on page 6 ‑ 43 . E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “ When to Add Engine Oil ” under Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 18 . F . Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “ Checking the Fluid Level ” under Automatic T ransmission Fluid (4-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 23 or Automatic T ransmission Fluid (6-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 26 . G. Remote Negative ( − ) T erminal (Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 44 . H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “ Checking Engine Oil ?[...]

Engine Oil For diesel engine vehicles, see “ Engine Oil ” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 16 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. T urn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way . Remove it agai[...]

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 16 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: . GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. . SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity , or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. . American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container . This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the Am[...]

Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty . Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter . This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably . For the oil life system to work properly , th[...]

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. T o reset the Engine Oil Life System on most vehicles: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display . See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 56 . 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds. The oil life will change to 100%. On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset as follows: 1. T urn the ig[...]

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 for more information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter T o inspect the air cleaner/filter , remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use c[...]

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter . 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. { W ARNING: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off. Automatic T ransmission Fluid (4-Speed T ransmission) When to Check and Change Automatic T ransmission Fluid A good time to c[...]

How to Check Automatic T ransmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: T oo much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. T oo much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. T oo little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid. W ait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: [...]

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 1. Locate the transmission dipstick handle with this graphic which is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 16 for more information on location. 2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 3. Push it back in all the way , wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to keep[...]

How to Add Automatic T ransmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low , add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not overfill. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle's warrant[...]

How to Check Automatic T ransmission Fluid Notice: T oo much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. T oo much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. T oo little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid. Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as follows: 1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface. Keep the engine running. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Park). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three second[...]

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way , wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading. 5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not overfill. 6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F). 7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way , then flip the handle[...]

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way , wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading. 5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is between 71°C and 93°C (160°F and 200°F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band. If the fluid level is low , add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not overfill. 6. If the fluid level is in[...]

5.3 L V8 Engine (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 engine and 6.2 L V8 Engine similar) A. Coolant Surge T ank B. Coolant Surge T ank Pressure Cap C. Engine Cooling Fan { W ARNING: An electric engine cooling fan can start even when the engine is not running. T o avoid injury , always keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any engine cooling fan. { W ARNING: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. 6-30[...]

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner , at 50 000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Always use DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle. Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low . If there is a problem with engine o[...]

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . T oo much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator , heater core, and other parts. Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 for more information. Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Ove[...]

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge T ank for Gasoline Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “ Cooling System ” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant fill procedure. { W ARNING: Y ou can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. { W ARNING: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury . Keep hands, clo[...]

T urn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly , and remove it. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates approximately 195°F (90°C). By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower . If the level is lower , add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the[...]

Y ou may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away . See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by the vehicle warranty . See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency . Notice: If the engine catches fire while dri[...]

If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEA TED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEA TED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem. If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: . Climb a long hill on a hot day . . Stop after high-speed driving. . Idle for long periods in traffic. . T ow a trailer . See T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 51 . If you get the ENGINE OVERHEA TED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEA TED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. T urn the air conditioning off.[...]

Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair . The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 18 . Engine Fan Noise If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the [...]

How to Check Power Steering Fluid T o check the power steering fluid: 1. T urn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary , add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use T o determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . Always use the proper fluid. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be co[...]

Notice: . When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water . . Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. W ater can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid. . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. . Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer . It can damage the vehicle's windshield washer system and paint. Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir i[...]

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary , only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. { W ARNING: If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. Y ou or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See “ Checking Brake Fluid ” in this section. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . Ch[...]

{ W ARNING: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice: . Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. . If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately . See Washing Your Vehicle on [...]

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 126 . If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately . Rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. Drum brakes have an inspection hole to inspect lining wear during scheduled maintenance. When the front brake pads are replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Br[...]

Battery If the vehicle is a T wo ‐ mode Hybrid, see the T wo ‐ mode Hybrid manual for more information. This vehicle has a maintenance free battery (or batteries). Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 16 for battery location. { DANGER: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling. V ehicle Storage { W ARNING: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. Y ou can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page [...]

Jump Starting If the vehicle is a T wo-mode Hybrid, see the T wo-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely . { W ARNING: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: . They contain acid that can burn you. . They contain gas that can explode or ignite. . They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly , some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty[...]

T o avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear , not in Neutral. Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty . Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 4. T urn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette li[...]

{ W ARNING: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { W ARNING: Using an open flame near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water . Y ou do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low , add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) Battery fluid contains [...]

6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know . Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ( − ) will go to a heavy , unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative ( − ) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause s[...]

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order , electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order , making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy , Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative ( − ) T erminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative ( − ) T erminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) T erminal T o disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad ba[...]

Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading. How to Check Lubricant 2500HD with 6.0L and 6.2L All Other Series and Engines T o get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. . For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series applications, the proper level is 0.04 inches to 0.75 inc[...]

. For all 6.0L and 6.2L 2500HD Series applications, the proper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. . For all 6.6L DURAMAX DIESEL 2500HD Series applications and all 3500 Series applications, the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 0.8 inches (17 mm to 21 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . Four-Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section al[...]

Manual Shift T ransfer Case A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug Active T ransfer Case A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug T o get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. 6-51[...]

When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant T o get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. 1500 Series A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug 6-52[...]

All except 1500 Series A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug . When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole. . When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . Noise Control System T ampering with Noise Control System Prohibited The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,0[...]

Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof: 1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or 2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person. Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below . Insulation: . Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation. Engine: . Removal or rendering engine speed governor , if the[...]

The vehicle should: . Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall. . Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall. . Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall. . Not have any snow , ice, or mud on it. . Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed. . Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat. . Have tires properly inflated. . Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle. Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps[...]

4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. T urn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface. 7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each head[...]

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 6 ‑ 62 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer . Halogen Bulbs { W ARNING: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. Y ou or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Headlamps T o replace on[...]

4. T urn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out. 5. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket. 6. Replace it with a new bulb socket. 7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb socket. 8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure. 9. Close the hood. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp T o replace one of these bulbs: 1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly . 6-58[...]

A. Cargo Lamp B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb (CHMSL) 2. Remove the bulbs by turning socket counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out. 3. Install the bulbs by pushing the bulb straight in and turning clockwise. 4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws. Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps T o replace a pickup box identification or fender marker lamp bulb: 1. Press the tab from the back to remove the lamp. 2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness. 3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp assembly . 4. Unplug the lamp. 5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the assembly . 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly . 6-59[...]

T aillamps, T urn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps T o replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the tailgate. T ailgate on page 3 ‑ 12 for more information. 2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch strikerpost and pull out the lamp assembly . 3. Determine which of the following taillamp assemblies applies to your vehicle. Dual Tire Models A. Stoplamp/T aillamp/T urn Signal Lamp B. Back-up Lamp C. Stoplamp/T aillamp/T urn Signal Lamp 4. Press the tab, if the vehicle has one, and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly . 6-60[...]

All Other Models A. Stoplamp/T aillamp/T urn Signal Lamp B. Stoplamp/T aillamp/T urn Signal Lamp C. Back-up Lamp D. Sidemarker Lamp 5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket. 6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly . 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly . T aillamps (Chassis Cab Models) A. Backup Lamp B. Stoplamp/T aillamp/T urn Signal Lamp T o replace one of these bulbs: 1. Remove the four screws. 2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly . 3. T urn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull the it straight out from the socket. 6-61[...]

4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it clockwise, and press it in until it is tight. 5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws. License Plate Lamp T o replace one of these bulbs: 1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket. 2. T urn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of the connector . 3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb socket. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-up Lamp 3047 or 921 Back-up Lamp* 1 156 Cargo Lamp and Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 912 Fender Marker Lamp W5WLL High-Beam Headlamp 9005 Low-[...]

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 for more information on wiper blade inspection. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here is how to remove the wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector . 3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 15 . 6-63[...]

Tires Y our new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer . If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your vehicle W arranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer . { CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. . Overloading your vehicle's tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. Y ou could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 . . Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury . Check all tires frequently to maintain the [...]

Notice: If the vehicle has low ‐ prof ile tires, they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards. Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P ‐ Metric and a L T ‐ Metric tire sidewall. Passenger (P ‐ Metric[...]

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performanc e Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of T ransportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor V ehicle Safety Standards. (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN [...]

Light T ruck (L T -Metric) Tire (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “ T ire Size ” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performanc e Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a [...]

(F) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 and Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 . Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size. Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire (A) Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. T ir[...]

Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire (A) Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters L T as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. T ire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width : The three ‐ digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio : A two ‐ digit number that indicates the tire height ‐ to ‐ width measurem ents. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the light truck (L T ‐ Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high[...]

Tire T erminology and Definitions Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight : This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width. Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrappe[...]

Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure. Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded V ehicle Weight : The sum of cur[...]

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating : An alphanume ric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. T raction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. T read : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. T readwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread rema[...]

Inflation - Tire Pressure T ires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively . Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under ‐ inflation or over ‐ inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under ‐ inflation), you can get the following: . T oo much flexing . T oo much heat . Tire overloading . Premature or irregular wear . Poor handling . Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air (over ‐ infla tion), you can get the following: . Unusual wear . Poor handling . Rough ride . Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific T ire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle's [...]

How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Y ou cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary . If the pressure is low , a[...]

When you end this high ‐ speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 . Dual Tire Operation When the vehicle is new , or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut tightening information, see Removing the Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 92 . The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire. Y our tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires[...]

Under ‐ inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability . Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under ‐ inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Y our vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly . The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one m[...]

At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display . The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver . For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 56 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 63 . The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when th[...]

. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully . See your dealer for service. . Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly . See Buying New Tires on page 6 ‑ 83 . . Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a [...]

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. T urn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen. If your vehicle does not have RKE, press the Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle information button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen. If your vehicl[...]

Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 ‑ 82 for more information. T ires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new . Any time you notice unusual wear , rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time f[...]

If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is the same as the rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating the tires. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is different from the dual rear tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires. The dual tires are rotated as a pair , and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires. When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the T ire and L[...]

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “ Wheel Nut T orque ” under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 126 . { W ARNING: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency , you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later , if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 90 . If your vehicle has a T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sen[...]

Y ou need new tires if any of the following statements are true: . Y ou can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. . Y ou can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber . . The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. . The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. . The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading conditions, a[...]

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four (or six if your vehicle has dual rear wheels). This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new . Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 80 for information on proper tire rotation. { W ARNING: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle properly , and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types may also[...]

Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability , and resistance to rollover . Additionally , if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti ‐ lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected. { W ARNING: If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. Y ou may increase the chance that you [...]

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors T ire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition T o These Grades. T readwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditio[...]

the minimum required by law . Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation , or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However , if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other , the alignment might need to be checked. [...]

If you need to replace any of the wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way , you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for the vehicle. { W ARNING: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. Y ou could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with be[...]

Tire Chains { W ARNING: If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/65R18, P275/55R20 or L T265/70R17 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. T o help avoid damage to your vehicle, d[...]

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy , but you can still steer . Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. { W ARNING: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if th[...]

W ARNING: (Continued) 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear – not in N (Neutral). 4. T urn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. T o be even more certain the vehicle will not move, put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks (A). A. Wheel Block B. Flat T ire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a [...]

Removing the Spare Tire and T ools Crew Cab A. Wing Nut Retaining T ool Kit B. T ool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob F . Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks Regular Cab A. Wing Nut Retaining T ool Kit B. T ool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob F . Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks 6-92[...]

Extended Cab A. Wing Nut Retaining T ool Kit B. T ool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is behind the passenger's seat. For extended and crew cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind the passenger's side second row seat. 1. T urn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head to release the jack from its holder . 2. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise. 3. Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise. Y ou will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare [...]

A. Spare T ire (V alve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. T ire/Wheel Retainer E. Hoist Shaft F . Hoist End of Extension T ool G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole H. Wheel Wrench I. Jack Handle Extensions J. Spare T ire Lock (If equipped) 1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the spare tire lock (J). T o remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition key turn and pull straight out. 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack handle extensions (I) as shown. 6-94[...]

3. Insert the hoist end (open end) (F) of the extension through the hole (G) in the rear bumper . Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F) connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 4. T urn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch, if the vehicle has one, may be engaged causing the tire not to lower . See Secondary Latch System on page 6 ‑ 103 . 5. Use the wheel wrench hook which allo[...]

6. T ilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer . Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch. Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and guide latch. 7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. 6-96[...]

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E). 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 90 for more information. 2. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened. Remove the entire center cap. 6-97[...]

If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel, and gently pry it out. 3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. 6-98[...]

Front Position - 1500 Models Front Position - All Other Models 4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (1500 Model vehicles), position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle's frame, behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other models), position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire. Rear Position – 1500 Models Rear Position – All Other Models 5. If the flat tire is on the rear , for 1500 models position the jack under the rear axle about 2 inches (5 cm) inboard of the shock absorber bracket; for all other models, position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anch[...]

Make sure that the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head. { W ARNING: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { W ARNING: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. T o help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 6. T urn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the grou[...]

8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 9. Install the spare tire. { W ARNING: Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash. 10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. 1 1. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub. 12. T urn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely . { W ARNING: If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come off and cause a crash. If any [...]

{ W ARNING: Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 126 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. T o avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on p[...]

goes on one way . Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten. Secondary Latch System This vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 106 . { W ARNING: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the ins[...]

5. If the spare does not lower , turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other . 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B), separating them so that the jack is balanced securely . 8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper . 6-104[...]

9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. T urn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 1 1. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { W ARNING: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely , make sure no one is behind you or on either side of [...]

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and T ools { W ARNING: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury . In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible. Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier . A. Flat or Spare T ire (V alve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. T ire/W[...]

2. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D) from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. T ilt the retainer down and through the center wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I) together , as shown. 4. Insert the hoist end (F) through the hole (G) in the rear bumper and onto the hoist shaft. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. 6-107[...]

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. Y ou cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely . Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle has one. T o store the jack and jack tools: A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks B. Wheel Blocks C. Wing Nut Retaining T ool Kit D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions E. T ool Bag F . Jack Mounting Bracket G. Jack H. Bolt Retaining[...]

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B) and jack (G) together with the wing nut (A) and retaining bolt (H). 4. Position the jack (G) in the mounting bracket (F). Position the holes in the base of the jack (G) onto the pin in the mounting bracket (F). 5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle. For more information, refer to Removing the Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 92 for more information. Spare Tire Y our vehicle, when new , had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly . See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 for information regarding proper tire inflation and lo[...]

Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery . Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather , and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery . It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly . Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home fur[...]

. Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. . T oo much cleaner that saturates the upholstery . . Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that can damage the vehicle's interior . Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of[...]

Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary , a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally . Do not use heat to dry . Never use steam to clean leather . Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather . Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform ma[...]

Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer , seal better , and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . W ashing Y our V ehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing it often. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty . Do not wash t[...]

Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer . If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agen[...]

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and T rim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water . Rinse with clean water . After rinsing thoroughly , dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners t[...]

Tires T o clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty . Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be re[...]

V ehicle Identification V ehicle Identification Number (VIN) This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The VIN also appears on the Certification/T ire and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “ Engine Specifications ” under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 126 for the vehicle's engine code. Service Parts Identification Label This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the followin[...]

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle on page 2 ‑ 92 and Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle on page 2 ‑ 92 . Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow , etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow , etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. If the current load is too heavy , the circuit breaker opens a[...]

Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block. The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown. Fuses Usage 1 Rear Seats 2 Rear Accessory Power Outlet 3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight 4 Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps, Driver Side T urn Signal 6 Driver Side T urn Signal, Stoplamp 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting 8 Passenger Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 6-1 19[...]

Fuses Usage 9 Passenger Door Module, Driver Unlock 10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) 1 1 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) 12 Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted Stoplamp 13 Rear Climate Controls 14 Power Mirror 15 Body Control Module (BCM) 16 Accessory Power Outlets 17 Interior Lamps 18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) 19 Rear Seat Entertainment 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power Liftgate 21 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature) Fuses Usage 22 Driver Information Center (DIC) 23 Rear Wiper 24 Cooled Seats 25 Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless Entry System 26 Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock Feature) Circuit Breaker Usage L T DR Driver Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Harness Connector Usage [...]

Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. T op View Harness Connector Usage BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 Harness Connector Usage HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker CB4 Rear Sliding Window 6-121[...]

Underhood Fuse Block If the vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. If the vehicle is a T wo-mode Hybrid, see the T wo-mode Hybrid manual for more information. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the cover to access the fuse block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. T o remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. Fuses Usage 1 Right T railer Stop/T urn Lamp 2 Electronic Suspension Control, Automatic Level Control Exhau[...]

Fuses Usage 5 Engine Control Module, Throttle Control 6 T railer Brake Controller 7 Front W asher 8 Oxygen Sensor 9 Antilock Brakes System 2 10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 1 1 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right Side) 14 T ransmission Control Module (Battery) 15 V ehicle Back-up Lamps 16 Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp 17 Air Conditioning Compressor 18 Oxygen Sensors 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 20 Fuel Pump 21 Fuel System Control Module 22 Not Used Fuses Usage 23 Not Used 24 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left Side) 25 Trailer Park Lamps 26 Driver Side Park Lamps 27 Passenger Side Park Lamps 28 Fog Lamps 29 Horn 30 Pas[...]

Fuses Usage 39 Climate Controls (Battery) 40 Airbag System (Ignition) 41 Amplifier 42 Audio System 43 Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise Control 44 Not Used 45 Airbag System (Battery) 46 Instrument Panel Cluster 47 Power T ake-Off 48 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition) 49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 50 Rear Defogger 51 Heated Mirrors Fuses Usage 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 53 Cigarette Lighter , Auxiliary Power Outlet 54 SEO Upfitter Usage 55 Climate Controls (Ignition) 56 Engine Control Module, Secondary Fuel Pump (Ignition) J-Case Fuses Usage 57 Cooling Fan 1 58 Not Used 59 Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System 60 Cooling Fan 2 61 Antilock Brake System 1 62 Starter 6-124[...]

J-Case Fuses Usage 63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 65 Not Used 66 Heated Windshield Washer System 67 Transfer Case 68 Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery Power) (Optional - 40A Fuse Required) 69 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1 70 Climate Control Blower 71 Not Used 72 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Relays Usage F AN HI Cooling Fan High Speed F AN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed F AN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor STRTR Starter PWR/TRN Powertrain FUEL PMP Fuel Pump PRK LAMP Parking Lamps REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger RUN/CRANK Switched Power 6-125[...]

Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 for more information. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information. Cooling System 4.3L V6 1500 Series 16.5 qt 15.6 L 4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.9 qt 16.0 L 5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.9 qt 16.0 L 6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 16.4 qt 15.5 L 6.2L V8[...]

Application Capacities English Metric Fuel T ank 1500 Series Standard and Short Box 26.0 gal 98.0 L 1500 Series Long Box 34.0 gal 128.7 L 2500 Series Standard Box 26.0 gal 98.0 L 2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 34.0 gal 128.7 L 3500 Series Chassis Cab 50.0 gal 189.0 L 3500 Chassis Cab – Front T ank 27.0 gal 102.0 L 3500 Chassis Cab – Rear T ank (if equipped) 23.0 gal 87.0 L T ransmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) Auto 4-Speed T ransmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L Auto 6-Speed T ransmission 6L80-E 6.0 qt 5.7 L Auto 6-Speed T ransmission 6L90-E 6.3 qt 6.0 L Auto 6-Speed T ransmission Allison 7.4 qt 7.0 L T ransfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 L Wheel Nut [...]

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code T ransmission Spark Plug Gap 4.3L V6 (LU3) X Automatic 0.060 in (1.52 mm) 4.8L V8 (L20) A Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management ™ (Iron Block) (LMG) 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management ™ (Aluminum Block) (LC9) 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96 or L Y6) G or K Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel (Aluminum Block) (L9H) 2 Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 6-128[...]

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ........................ .... 7-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 1 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 7-1[...]

Maintenance Schedule Introduction This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel manual. Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty . As the vehicle owner , you are responsible for the scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend having your dealer perform these services. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy ,[...]

At your dealer , you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available. Y our dealer has specially trained service technicians, uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 15 . We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer . Rotation of New Tires T o maintain ride, handling, and performance of the vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,[...]

Maintenance I . Change engine oil and filter . See Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 18 . An Emission Control Service. . Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 31 . . Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 ‑ 38 . . T ire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 73 . . T ire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 80 . . Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 80 . . Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must be repaired and the fluid level checked. . Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions o[...]

. Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, folding seat hardware, and tailgate hinges, linkage, and handle pivot points lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 13 . More frequent lubrication may be required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer , seal better , and not stick or squeak. . Restraint system component check. See Checking the Restraint Systems on page 2 ‑ 94 . . Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic T ransmission Fluid (4-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 23 or Automatic T ransmission Fluid (6-Speed T ransmi[...]

Once a Y ear . Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . . Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism check. See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . . Automatic transmission shiftlock control system check. See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . . Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . . Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser outside cleaning. See Cooling System on page 6 ‑ 29 . . Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or damaged components. . Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or binding. [...]

First Engine Oil Change After Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles . Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 21 . . Automatic transmission fluid change (severe service) for vehicles with Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) over 3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather , in hilly or mountainous terrain, when frequently towing a trailer , or used for taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic T ransmission Fluid (4-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 23 or Automatic T ransmission Fluid (6-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 26 . . Four ‐ wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change (severe service) for vehicles mainly d[...]

First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles . Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See Automatic T ransmission Fluid (4-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 23 or Automatic T ransmission Fluid (6-Speed T ransmission) on page 6 ‑ 26 . . Four ‐ wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change (normal service). Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear , and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody , care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and con[...]

Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter . Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • T ire inflation pressures check. • • T ire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Allison T ransmission ® only: External transmission filter replacement (at the first maintenance service performed on the vehicle only). 7-9[...]

Scheduled Maintenance (cont'd) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Steering and suspension inspection. • Chassis components lubrication. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission fluid level check. • Four ‐ wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Shields inspection, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) only . • 7-10[...]

Owner Checks and Services Starter Switch Check { W ARNING: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly . If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. T ry to start the engine in each gear . The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service. Automatic T ransmission Shift Lock Control System Check { W ARN[...]

Ignition T ransmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. . The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park). . The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF . Contact your dealer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic T ransmission P (Park) Mechanism Check { W ARNING: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. Y ou or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairl[...]

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/ or an Allison T ransmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number , or specification can be obtained from your dealer . Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. T o determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 18 . Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-[...]

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678). T ransfer Case (Four ‐ Wheel Drive) DEXRON ® -VI Automatic T ransmission Fluid. Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (T wo-Wheel Drive with 4 ‐ Speed Auto. T rans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 1095351 1). Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Usage Fluid/Lubricant Body Door Hinge Pins, T a[...]

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number , or specification can be obtained from your dealer . If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C* High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C Oil Filter 4.3L V6 25010792 PF47 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 4.3L V6 12568387 41-101 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-1 10 Wiper Blades – 21.6 in (55.0 cm) 25877402 — *15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted. 7-15[...]

Engine Drive Belt Routing V6 Engines V8 Engines If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. 7-16[...]

Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-17[...]

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-18[...]

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-19[...]

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-20[...]

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Customer Assistance for T ext T elephone (TTY) U s e r s ................. ............ ............ 8 - 6 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Courtesy T ransportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Collision Damage[...]

Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Y our satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally , any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however , despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur . If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally , concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts mana[...]

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However , if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and T wo, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New V ehicle Limited W arranty . Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the [...]

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/ Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter , and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter . The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decisio[...]

Online Owner Center Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www .gmownercenter .com/chevrolet Information and services customized for your specific vehicle — all in one convenient place. . Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more . Online service and maintenance records . Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide . Exclusive privileges and offers . Recall notices for your specific vehicle . OnStar ® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links: Chevrolet − www .chevrolet.com Chevrolet Merchandise — www .chevymall.com Help Center — www .chevrolet.com/helpcenter . F AQ . Contact Us My GM Canada (Canada) — www .gm.ca My GM Canada is a password-protected se[...]

Customer Assistance for T ext T elephone (TTY) Users T o assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use T ext T elephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However , if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P .O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI[...]

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V . Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P . 1 1910, Mexico, D.F . 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to det[...]

. Odometer reading, V ehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle . Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years/ 100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered. Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New V ehicle Limited W arranty . Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an o[...]

Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance . Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. . Legal fines. . Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. . T owing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway . Services Specific to Canadian Purchased V ehicles . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service. . Lock-Out Service: V ehicle registration is required. . T rip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. There is a limi[...]

Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately , keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/ retailer , let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same [...]

Public T ransportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer's shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs. Courtesy Rental V ehicle Y [...]

Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance, durability , and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New V ehicle W arranty . Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair . These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to m[...]

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully , as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs. If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. . Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. . If there has been an injury , call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its positio[...]

. Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle. Whether you select a dealer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure you are comfortable with them. Remember , you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time. . Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome this opportunity . Managing the V ehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair . If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, tak[...]

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway T raffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However , NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer , or General Motors. T o contact NHTSA, you may call the V ehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY : 1[...]

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body , etc. Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. Owner Information Owner publications are written specifical[...]

V ehicle Data Recording and Privacy Y our GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle ’ s performance and how it is driven. For example, your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer technician service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner ’ s per[...]

GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or , if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request of police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or , as required by law . Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner . OnStar ® If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar T erms and Conditions in the OnStar Own[...]

A Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Active Fuel Management ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 17 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 5-37 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Appearance Care (cont.) Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 W ashing Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 13 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 13 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 14 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Bulb Replacement (cont.) License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 T aillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Buying New T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 C Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 W arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Cleaning (cont.) Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 12 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 10 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 12 T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 16 W ashing Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 13 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49, 4-56 DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Driving At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Highway[...]

Engine (cont.) Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 O i l ........ ............ ............ ............. ...6 - 1 8 Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 18 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 19 Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122 Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 18 G Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Gauges Engine Cool[...]

I Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Infants and Y oung Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Inflation - T ire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Integrated T railer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 [...]

Lights (cont.) On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 StabiliT rak ® Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 T ire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 T ow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Loading Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

N Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121 New V ehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Noise Control System, T ampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 O Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 T rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1 Driving . . . . . [...]

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . . 6-5 Phone Bluetooth ® ............ ............ ............. .. 4 - 1 2 1 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 18 Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Recreational Vehicle T owing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Seats (cont.) Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Memory , Mirrors and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 System Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 T T achometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 T ailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 T aillamps T urn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-60 T ampering with Noise Control System Prohibited . . . .[...]

T ires (cont.) T erminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Wheel Alignment and T ire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 When It Is T ime for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82 T ow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 T ow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 T owing Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 T owing a Trailer . . . . . . .[...]

W W arning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 W arnings DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 When It Is T ime for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82 Where to Put the Child R[...]